Brother MFC 8890DW User Manual

USER’S GUIDE  
MFC-8480DN  
MFC-8890DW  
Version 0  
USA/CAN  
Brother numbers  
IMPORTANT  
For technical help, you must call the country where you bought the machine. Calls must be  
made from within that country.  
Register your product  
By registering your product with Brother International Corporation, you will be recorded as the  
original owner of the product. Your registration with Brother:  
may serve as confirmation of the purchase date of your product should you lose your receipt;  
may support an insurance claim by you in the event of product loss covered by insurance; and,  
will help us notify you of enhancements to your product and special offers.  
Please complete and fax the Brother Warranty Registration And Test Sheet or, for your  
convenience and most efficient way to register your new product, register on-line at  
FAQs (frequently asked questions)  
The Brother Solutions Center is our one-stop resource for all your Fax Machine/Multi-Function  
Center needs. You can download the latest software and utilities and read FAQs and  
troubleshooting tips to learn how to get the most from your Brother product.  
Note  
You can check here for Brother driver updates.  
To keep your machine performance up to date, check here for the latest firmware upgrade  
®
(Windows ).  
For Customer Service  
In USA:  
1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437)  
1-901-379-1215 (fax)  
In Canada:  
1-877-BROTHER  
(514) 685-4898 (fax)  
Service Center Locator (USA only)  
For the location of a Brother authorized service center, call 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437).  
Service Center Locations (Canada only)  
For the location of a Brother authorized service center, call 1-877-BROTHER.  
i
       
Ordering accessories and supplies  
For best quality results use only genuine Brother accessories, which are available at most Brother  
retailers. If you cannot find the accessory you need and you have a Visa, MasterCard, Discover,  
or American Express credit card, you can order accessories directly from Brother. (You can visit  
us online for a complete selection of the Brother accessories and supplies that are available for  
purchase.)  
Note  
In Canada, only Visa and MasterCard are accepted.  
In USA:  
1-877-552-MALL (1-877-552-6255)  
1-800-947-1445 (fax)  
In Canada:  
1-877-BROTHER  
Description  
Item  
Toner Cartridge Standard  
TN-620 (Approx. 3,000 pages)  
TN-650 (Approx. 8,000 pages)  
Toner Cartridge High Yield  
Drum Unit  
DR-620 (Approx. 25,000 pages)  
LG3077001  
Telephone Line Cord  
User’s Guide  
LS7438001 (English for USA and Canada)  
LS7438002 (French for Canada)  
Quick Setup Guide  
(MFC-8480DN) LS7493001 (English for USA and Canada)  
(MFC-8890DW) LS7450001 (English for USA and Canada)  
(MFC-8480DN) LS7493002 (French for Canada)  
(MFC-8890DW) LS7450002 (French for Canada)  
1
2
Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752.  
Drum yield is approximate, and may vary by type of use.  
ii  
     
Notice - Disclaimer of Warranties  
(USA and Canada)  
BROTHER’S LICENSOR(S), AND THEIR DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR  
AGENTS (COLLECTIVELY BROTHER’S LICENSOR) MAKE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR  
IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, REGARDING THE  
SOFTWARE. BROTHER’S LICENSOR(S) DOES NOT WARRANT, GUARANTEE OR MAKE  
ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE  
SOFTWARE IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, CURRENTNESS  
OR OTHERWISE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE  
SOFTWARE IS ASSUMED BY YOU. THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES IS NOT  
PERMITTED BY SOME STATES IN THE USA AND SOME PROVINCES IN CANADA. THE  
ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.  
IN NO EVENT WILL BROTHER’S LICENSOR(S) BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY  
CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR  
LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS  
INFORMATION, AND THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE  
SOFTWARE EVEN IF BROTHER’S LICENSOR HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF  
SUCH DAMAGES. BECAUSE SOME STATES IN THE USA AND SOME PROVINCES IN  
CANADA DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR  
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY  
TO YOU. IN ANY EVENT BROTHER’S LICENSOR’S LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ACTUAL  
DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER, AND REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE  
ACTION (WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), PRODUCT  
LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE), WILL BE LIMITED TO $50.  
Compilation and Publication Notice  
Under the supervision of Brother Industries Ltd., this manual has been compiled and published,  
covering the latest product descriptions and specifications.  
The contents of this manual and the specifications of this product are subject to change without  
notice.  
Brother reserves the right to make changes without notice in the specifications and materials  
contained herein and shall not be responsible for any damages (including consequential) caused  
by reliance on the materials presented, including but not limited to typographical and other errors  
relating to the publication.  
iii  
 
®
Brother One-Year Limited Warranty and Replacement Service  
(USA Only)  
Who is covered:  
3 Damage caused by another device or  
software used with this Product (including  
but not limited to damage resulting from  
use of non Brother -brand parts and  
Consumable and Accessory Items);  
4 Consumable and Accessory Items that  
expired in accordance with a rated life;  
5 Problems arising from other than defects in  
materials or workmanship; and,  
6 Normal Periodic Maintenance Items, such  
as Paper Feeding Kit, Fuser and Laser  
Units.  
This limited warranty is VOID if this Product  
has been altered or modified in any way  
(including but not limited to attempted warranty  
repair without authorization from Brother  
and/or alteration/removal of the serial  
number).  
This limited warranty (“warranty”) is given  
only to the original end-user/retail  
purchaser (referred to in this warranty as  
“Original Purchaser”) of the accompanying  
product, consumables and accessories  
(collectively referred to in this warranty as  
“this Product”).  
If you purchased a product from someone  
other than an authorized Brother reseller in  
the United States or if the product was used  
(including but not limited to floor models or  
refurbished product), prior to your  
purchase you are not the Original  
Purchaser and the product that you  
purchased is not covered by this warranty.  
®
What is covered:  
This Product includes a Machine and  
Consumable and Accessory Items.  
Consumable and Accessory Items include  
but are not limited to print heads, toner,  
drums, ink cartridges, print cartridges,  
cordless handset battery, refill ribbons,  
thermal PLUS paper and thermal paper.  
What to do if you think your Product is  
eligible for warranty service:  
Report your issue to either our Customer  
Service Hotline at 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-  
276-8437) or to a Brother Authorized Service  
Center within the applicable warranty  
period. Supply Brother or the Brother  
Authorized Service Center with a copy of your  
dated bill of sale showing that this Product was  
local Brother Authorized Service Center(s),  
Except as otherwise provided herein,  
Brother warrants that the Machine and the  
accompanying  
Consumable  
and  
Accessory Items will be free from defects in  
materials and workmanship, when used  
under normal conditions.  
This warranty applies only to products  
purchased and used in the United States.  
For products purchased in, but used  
outside, the United States, this warranty  
covers only warranty service within the  
United States (and does not include  
shipping outside the United States).  
What Brother will ask you to do:  
After contacting Brother or  
a
Brother  
Authorized Service Center, you may be  
required to deliver (by hand if you prefer) or  
send the Product properly packaged, freight  
prepaid, to the Authorized Service Center  
together with a photocopy of your bill of sale.  
You are responsible for the cost of  
shipping, packing product, and insurance  
(if you desire). You are also responsible for  
loss or damage to this Product in shipping.  
What is the length of the Warranty Periods:  
Machines: one year from the original  
purchase date.  
Accompanying  
Consumable  
and  
Accessory Items: 90 days from the original  
purchase date or the rated life of  
consumable, whichever comes first.  
What Brother will do:  
If the problem reported concerning your  
Machine and/or accompanying Consumable  
and Accessory Items is covered by this  
warranty and if you first reported the problem  
to Brother or an Authorized Service Center  
within the applicable warranty period, Brother  
or its Authorized Service Center will repair or  
replace the Machine and/or accompanying  
Consumable and Accessory Items at no  
charge to you for parts or labor. The decision  
as to whether to repair or replace the Machine  
and/or accompanying Consumable and  
Accessory Items is made by Brother in its sole  
discretion. Brother reserves the right to supply  
What is NOT covered:  
This warranty does not cover:  
1 Physical damage to this Product;  
2 Damage caused by improper installation,  
improper or abnormal use, misuse, neglect  
or accident (including but not limited to  
transporting this Product without the proper  
preparation and/or packaging);  
iv  
 
®
Brother One-Year Limited Warranty and Replacement Service  
(USA Only)  
a refurbished or remanufactured replacement  
Machine and/or accompanying Consumable  
and Accessory Items and use refurbished  
parts provided such replacement products  
conform to the manufacturer’s specifications  
for new product/parts. The repaired or  
replacement Machine and/or accompanying  
Consumable and Accessory Items will be  
returned to you freight prepaid or made  
available for you to pick up at a conveniently  
located Authorized Service Center.  
If the Machine and/or accompanying  
Consumable and Accessory Items are not  
covered by this warranty (either stage), you  
will be charged for shipping the Machine  
and/or accompanying Consumable and  
Accessory Items back to you and charged for  
any service and/or replacement parts/products  
at Brother’s then current published rates.  
damage to the product; or (iv) the warranty  
period on your original Product has expired or  
has not been sufficiently validated with a copy  
of the proof of purchase (bill of sale). The  
replacement Machine you receive (even if  
refurbished or remanufactured) will be  
covered by the balance of the limited warranty  
period remaining on the original Product, plus  
an additional thirty (30) days. You will keep the  
replacement Machine that is sent to you and  
your original Machine shall become the  
property of Brother. Retain your original  
Accessory Items and a copy of the return  
freight bill, signed by the courier.  
Limitations:  
Brother is not responsible for damage to or  
loss of any equipment, media, programs or  
data related to the use of this Product. Except  
for the repair or replacement as described  
above, Brother shall not be liable for any  
direct, indirect, incidental or consequential  
damages or specific relief. Because some  
states do not allow the exclusion or limitation  
of consequential or incidental damages, the  
above limitation may not apply to you.  
The foregoing are your sole (i.e., only) and  
exclusive remedies under this warranty.  
What happens when Brother elects to  
replace your Machine:  
When a replacement Machine is authorized by  
Brother, and you have delivered the Machine  
to an Authorized Service Center, the  
Authorized Service Center will provide you  
with a replacement Machine after receiving  
one from Brother. If you are dealing directly  
with Brother’s Express Exchange Service  
Brother will send to you a replacement  
Machine shipped for receipt within two  
business days, with the understanding that  
you will, after receipt of the replacement  
Machine, supply the required proof of  
purchase information, together with the  
Machine that Brother agreed to replace. You  
are then expected to pack the Machine that  
Brother agreed to replace in the package from  
the replacement Machine and return it to  
Brother using the pre-paid freight bill supplied  
by Brother in accordance with the instructions  
provided by Brother. Since you will be in  
possession of two machines, Brother will  
require that you provide a valid major credit  
card number. Brother will issue a hold against  
the credit card account number that you  
provide until Brother receives your original  
Product and determines that your original  
Product is entitled to warranty coverage. Your  
credit card will be charged up to the cost of a  
new Product only if: (i) you do not return your  
original Product to Brother within five (5)  
business days; (ii) the problems with your  
original Product are not covered by the limited  
warranty; (iii) the proper packaging  
instructions are not followed and has caused  
THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL  
OTHER WARRANTIES, WRITTEN OR  
ORAL,  
WHETHER  
EXPRESSED  
BY  
AFFIRMATION, PROMISE, DESCRIPTION,  
DRAWING, MODEL OR SAMPLE. ANY AND  
ALL WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THIS  
ONE, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  
INCLUDING IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE HEREBY  
DISCLAIMED.  
This Limited Warranty is the only warranty  
that Brother is giving for this Product. It is  
the final expression and the exclusive and  
only statement of Brother’s obligations to  
you. It replaces all other agreements and  
understandings that you may have with  
Brother or its representatives.  
This warranty gives you certain rights and  
you may also have other rights that may  
vary from state to state.  
This Limited Warranty (and Brother’s  
obligation to you) may not be changed in  
any way unless you and Brother sign the  
same piece of paper in which we (1) refer  
to this Product and your bill of sale date, (2)  
describe the change to this warranty and  
(3) agree to make that change.  
Important: We recommend that you keep all  
original packing materials, in the event that  
you ship this Product.  
© 2008 Brother International Corporation  
v
BROTHER MULTIFUNCTION CENTER / FAX MACHINE  
LIMITED WARRANTY  
(Canada only)  
Pursuant to the limited warranty of 1 year from the date of purchase for labour and parts,  
Brother International Corporation (Canada) Ltd. (“Brother”), or its Authorized Service  
Centres, will repair or replace (at Brother’s sole discretion) this MFC/Fax machine free of  
charge if defective in material or workmanship. This warranty applies only to products  
purchased and used in Canada.  
This limited Warranty does not include cleaning, consumables (including, without limitation,  
ink cartridges, print cartridges, print rolls, thermal paper rolls, toner cartridges, drum units,  
OPC belts, fixing units, print heads, paper feed rollers, transfer rolls, cleaning rollers, waste  
toner packs, oil bottles) or damage caused by accident, neglect, misuse or improper  
installation or operation, any damage caused from service, maintenance, modifications, or  
tampering by anyone other than a Brother Authorized Service Representative, or if shipped  
out of the country.  
The use of supplies or consumable items that are non-Brother products may void your  
warranty. This limited warranty ceases when this machine is rented, sold, or otherwise  
disposed of. Operation of the MFC/Fax machine in excess of the specifications or with the  
Serial Number or Rating Label removed shall be deemed abuse and all repairs thereafter  
shall be the sole liability of the end-user/purchaser.  
In order to obtain warranty service, the MFC/Fax machine must be delivered or shipped  
freight prepaid by the end-user/purchaser to a “Brother” Authorized Service Centre, together  
with your Canadian Proof of Purchase in the form of a Sales Receipt.  
When shipping or transporting your MFC/Fax machine, please refer to your Operation  
Manual for the proper packaging procedures.  
For Laser units: Failure to remove the Toner Cartridge (and Toner Drum Unit, waste toner  
packs or oil bottles on applicable models) during shipping or transport will cause severe  
damage to the Laser MFC/Fax machine and will void the Warranty.  
For inkjet units: (When shipping your Inkjet MFC/Fax machine remove the ink cartridges and  
replace them with the original protective parts. If original protective parts are not available,  
leave ink cartridges installed. Please avoid shipping the unit without original protective parts  
or ink cartridges.) Damage to your print head resulting from packing the Inkjet MFC/Fax  
machine without the ink cartridges or the protective parts will void your warranty.  
Improper packaging may cause severe damage to the machine during shipping and will void  
the warranty.  
BROTHER DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED  
INCLUDING,  
WITHOUT  
LIMITATIONS,  
ANY  
IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES  
OF  
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, EXCEPT TO THE  
EXTENT THAT ANY WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY LAW CANNOT BE VALIDLY WAIVED.  
No oral or written information, advice or representation provided by Brother, its Authorized  
Service Centres, Distributors, Dealers, Agents or employees, shall create another warranty  
or modify this warranty. The warranty states Brother’s entire liability and your exclusive  
remedy against Brother for any failure of the MFC/Fax machine to operate properly.  
Neither Brother nor anyone else involved in the development, production, or delivery of this  
MFC/Fax machine shall be liable for any indirect, incidental, special, consequential,  
exemplary, or punitive damages, including lost profits, arising from the use of or inability to  
use the product, even if advised by the end user/purchaser of the possibility of such damages.  
Since some Provinces do not allow the above limitation of liability, such limitation, may not  
apply to you.  
This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other  
rights which vary from Province to Province.  
Warranty Service is available at Brother Authorized  
Service Centres throughout Canada. For Technical  
Assistance or for the name and location of your nearest  
Authorized Service Centre call 1-877-BROTHER.  
vi  
 
Table of Contents  
®
vii  
viii  
ix  
x
13  
Printing data from a USB Flash memory drive or a digital camera  
supporting mass storage  
92  
Printing data directly from the USB Flash memory drive or digital camera  
supporting mass storage ..................................................................................93  
xi  
xii  
xiii  
xiv  
General information  
1
1
Using the  
documentation  
WARNING  
1
Warnings tell you what to do to prevent  
possible personal injury.  
Thank you for buying a Brother machine!  
Reading the documentation will help you  
make the most of your machine.  
CAUTION  
Cautions specify procedures you must  
follow or avoid to prevent possible minor  
injuries.  
Symbols and conventions  
used in the documentation  
1
IMPORTANT  
The following symbols and conventions are  
used throughout the documentation.  
IMPORTANT describes procedures you  
must follow or avoid to prevent possible  
machine problems or damage to other  
objects.  
Bold  
Bold style identifies keys on the  
machine control panel or  
computer screen.  
Electrical Hazard icons alert you to a  
possible electrical shock.  
Italics  
Italicized style emphasizes an  
important point or refers you to  
a related topic.  
Hot Surface icons warn you not to  
touch machine parts that are hot.  
Courier Courier New font identifies the  
Notes tell you how you should  
New  
messages shown on the LCD  
of the machine.  
respond to a situation that may arise  
or give tips about how the current  
operation works with other features.  
2
     
General information  
c If the model name screen appears, click  
your model name. The CD-ROM main  
menu will appear.  
Accessing the  
Software User’s Guide  
and Network User’s  
Guide  
1
1
This User’s Guide does not contain all the  
information about the machine such as how  
to use the advanced features of Fax, Printer,  
Scanner, PC Fax and Network. When you are  
ready to learn detailed information about  
these operations, read the  
Software User’s Guide and  
Network User’s Guide.  
If this window does not appear, use  
®
Windows Explorer to find and run the  
start.exe program from the root directory  
of the Brother CD-ROM.  
Viewing documentation  
1
d Click Documentation.  
Viewing documentation (Windows®)  
1
e Click the documentation you want to  
To view the documentation, from the Start  
menu, point to Brother, MFC-XXXX (where  
XXXX is your model name) from the program  
group, and then click  
read:  
HTML documents (2 manuals):  
Software User’s Guide and  
Network User’s Guide in HTML  
format.  
User’s Guides in HTML format.  
If you have not installed the software, you can  
find the documentation by following the  
instructions below:  
This format is recommended for  
viewing on your computer.  
PDF documents (4 manuals):  
a Turn on your PC.  
User’s Guide for stand-alone  
operations,Software User’s Guide,  
Network User’s Guide and  
Quick Setup Guide.  
Insert the Brother CD-ROM labeled  
®
Windows into your CD-ROM drive.  
b If the language selection screen  
appears, click your language.  
This format is recommended for  
printing the manuals. Click to go to  
the Brother Solutions Center, where  
you can view or download the PDF  
documents. (Internet access and  
PDF Reader software are required.)  
3
     
Chapter 1  
How to find scanning instructions  
1
Viewing documentation (Macintosh®)  
1
There are several ways you can scan  
documents. You can find the instructions as  
follows:  
®
a Turn on your Macintosh .  
Insert the Brother CD-ROM labeled  
®
Macintosh into your CD-ROM drive.  
Software User’s Guide:  
1
b The following window will appear.  
Scanning a document using the TWAIN  
driver in Chapter 2  
Scanning a document using the WIA  
®
®
driver (Windows XP/Windows Vista ) in  
Chapter 2  
Using ControlCenter3 in Chapter 3  
Network Scanning in Chapter 4  
ScanSoft™ PaperPort™ 11SE with  
OCR How-to-Guides:  
1
c Double-click the Documentation icon.  
The complete ScanSoft™ PaperPort™  
11SE with OCR How-to-Guides can be  
viewed from the Help selection in the  
ScanSoft™ PaperPort™ 11SE  
application.  
d If the language selection screen  
appears, double-click your language.  
e Double-click the top page file to view the  
Software User’s Guide and Network  
User’s Guide in HTML format.  
How to find Network setup  
instructions (MFC-8890DW)  
1
f Click the documentation you want to  
read.  
Your machine can be connected to a wireless  
or wired network. You can find basic setup  
instructions in the Quick Setup Guide. If your  
wireless access point supports  
Software User’s Guide  
Network User’s Guide  
SecureEasySetup™, Wi-Fi Protected Setup  
or AOSS™, follow the steps in the Quick  
Setup Guide. For more information about  
network setup please see the Network User's  
Guide.  
Note  
The documents are also available in PDF  
format (4 manuals): User’s Guide for  
stand-alone operations,  
Software User’s Guide,  
Network User’s Guide and  
Quick Setup Guide. The PDF format is  
recommended for printing the manuals.  
Double-click Brother Solutions Center  
icon to go to the Brother Solutions Center,  
where you can view or download the PDF  
documents. (Internet access and PDF  
Reader software are required.)  
4
General information  
How to find scanning instructions  
1
Accessing Brother  
support (Windows )  
You can find all the contacts you will need,  
such as Web support (Brother Solutions  
Center), Customer Service and Brother  
Authorized Service Centers in Brother  
numbers on page i and on the Brother  
CD-ROM.  
There are several ways you can scan  
documents. You can find the instructions as  
follows:  
®
1
1
Software User’s Guide:  
1
Scanning in Chapter 9  
Using ControlCenter2 in Chapter 10  
Network Scanning in Chapter 11  
Click Brother Support on the main menu.  
The following screen will appear:  
Presto! PageManager User’s Guide:  
1
The complete Presto! PageManager  
User’s Guide can be viewed from the Help  
selection in the Presto! PageManager  
application.  
How to find Network setup  
instructions (MFC-8890DW)  
1
Your machine can be connected to a wireless  
or wired network. You can find basic setup  
instructions in the Quick Setup Guide. If your  
wireless access point supports  
SecureEasySetup™, Wi-Fi Protected Setup  
or AOSS™, follow the steps in the Quick  
Setup Guide. For more information about  
network setup please see the Network User's  
Guide.  
To access our web site  
Brother Home Page.  
To view all Brother Numbers, including  
Customer Service numbers for the USA  
and Canada, click Support Information.  
To access the USA Brother online  
shopping mall  
additional product and services  
information, click Brother Mall.com.  
To access Canada’s Brother online  
additional product and services  
information, click Shop Online (Canada).  
For the latest news and product support  
information  
Brother Solutions Center.  
To visit our web site for original/genuine  
Brother supplies  
Supplies Information.  
To return to the main page, click Back or,  
if you have finished, click Exit.  
5
 
Chapter 1  
Control panel overview  
1
MFC-8480DN and MFC-8890DW have the same keys.  
1
One Touch keys  
4
Menu keys:  
Menu  
These 20 keys give you instant access to 40  
previously stored numbers.  
Lets you access the Menu to program your  
settings in this machine.  
Shift  
Lets you access One Touch numbers 21 to 40  
when held down.  
Clear/Back  
Deletes entered data or lets you cancel the  
current setting.  
2
3
Status LED  
OK  
The LED will flash and change color depending  
on the machine status.  
Lets you store your settings in the machine.  
Volume keys  
LCD  
d or c  
Displays messages to help you set up and use  
your machine.  
Press to scroll backwards or forwards through  
menu selections. Press to change the volume  
when in fax or standby mode.  
A four level indicator shows the current  
wireless signal strength if you are using a  
wireless connection.  
a or b  
Press to scroll through the menus and options.  
5
Dial pad  
Use these keys to dial telephone and fax  
numbers and as a keyboard for entering  
information into the machine.  
0
Max  
(Canada only) The # key temporarily switches  
the dialing mode from Pulse to Tone during a  
telephone call.  
6
   
General information  
1
6
7
Stop/Exit  
9
Mode keys:  
Fax  
Stops an operation or exits from a menu.  
Start  
Puts the machine in Fax mode.  
Lets you start sending faxes, making copies or  
scanning.  
Scan  
Puts the machine in Scan mode.  
8
Copy keys:  
Duplex  
(For details about scanning, see the Software  
User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
You can choose Duplex to copy on both sides  
of the paper.  
Copy  
Puts the machine in Copy mode.  
Contrast/Quality  
Lets you change the quality or contrast for the  
next copy.  
Enlarge/Reduce  
Reduces or enlarges copies.  
Tray Select  
Lets you change which tray will be used for the  
next copy.  
Sort  
Sorts multiple copies using the ADF.  
N in 1  
You can choose N in 1 to copy 2 or 4 pages  
onto one page.  
7
   
Chapter 1  
10 Fax and telephone keys:  
Hook  
Press before dialing if you want to make sure a  
fax machine will answer, and then press Start.  
Also, press this key after you pick up the  
handset of an external telephone during the  
F/T ring (fast double-rings).  
Resolution  
Sets the resolution when sending a fax.  
Search/Speed Dial  
Lets you look up numbers stored in memory. It  
also lets you access speed dial numbers  
directly if you hold down the Shift key and  
press Search/Speed Dial, and then enter a  
three digit number.  
Redial/Pause  
Redials the last number called. It also inserts a  
pause when programming quick dial numbers  
or when dialing a number manually.  
11 Print Keys:  
Secure/Direct  
This key has two functions.  
Secure  
You can print data saved in the memory  
when you enter your four-digit password.  
(For details about using the Secure key,  
see the Software User’s Guide on the CD-  
ROM.)  
When using Secure Function Lock, you can  
switch restricted users by holding down  
Shift as you press Secure. (See Secure  
Direct  
Lets you print data from a USB Flash  
memory drive that you can connect directly  
to the machine. The Direct key will be  
active when a USB Flash memory drive is  
connected to the machine’s USB direct  
interface.  
Job Cancel  
Cancels a programmed print job and clears it  
from the machine’s memory.  
To cancel multiple print jobs, hold down this  
key until the LCD shows  
Job Cancel (All).  
8
       
General information  
Status LED indications  
1
The Status LED (light emitting diode) will flash and change color depending on the machine’s  
status.  
1
LED  
Machine Status  
Description  
Sleep Mode  
The power switch is off or the machine is in Sleep mode.  
Warming Up  
The machine is warming up for printing.  
Green  
(blinking)  
Ready  
The machine is ready to print.  
Green  
Receiving Data  
The machine is either receiving data from the computer,  
processing data in memory, or printing data.  
Yellow  
(blinking)  
Data Remaining  
in Memory  
Print data remains in the machine memory.  
Yellow  
Service error  
Follow the steps below.  
1. Turn off the power switch.  
2. Wait a few seconds, and then turn it back on and try to print  
again.  
Red  
(blinking)  
If you cannot clear the error and you see the same service call  
indication after turning the machine back on, please call Brother  
Customer Service. (See Brother numbers on page i.)  
Cover open  
Toner Life End  
Paper error  
The front cover or fuser cover is open. Close the cover.  
Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.  
Red  
Put paper in the tray or clear the paper jam. Check the LCD  
message.  
Scan lock  
Check that the scanner lock lever is released.  
Others  
Check the LCD message.  
Note  
When the power switch is off or the machine is in Sleep mode, the LED is off.  
9
   
Loading paper and documents  
2
2
Loading paper in the standard  
paper tray  
Loading paper and  
print media  
2
2
The machine can feed paper from the  
standard paper tray, optional lower tray or  
multi-purpose tray.  
Printing on plain paper, thin paper,  
recycled paper or transparencies from  
the paper tray  
2
When you put paper into the paper tray, note  
the following:  
a Pull the paper tray completely out of the  
machine.  
If your application software supports  
paper size selection on the print menu,  
you can select it through the software. If  
your application software does not  
support it, you can set the paper size in  
the printer driver or by using the control  
panel buttons.  
b While pressing the blue paper-guide  
release lever (1), slide the paper guides  
to fit the paper size you are loading in  
the tray. Make sure that the guides are  
firmly in the slots.  
10  
       
Loading paper and documents  
Note  
IMPORTANT  
For Legal and Folio size paper, press the  
release button (1) in the bottom of the  
paper tray and then pull out the back of the  
paper tray. (Legal or Folio size paper are  
not available in some regions.)  
Make sure the paper guides touch the  
sides of the paper so it will feed properly.  
2
e Put the paper tray firmly back in the  
machine. Make sure that it is completely  
inserted into the machine.  
1
f Unfold the support flap (1) to prevent  
paper from sliding off the face-down  
output tray.  
c Fan the stack of paper well to avoid  
paper jams and misfeeds.  
1
d Put paper in the tray, and make sure that  
the paper is below the maximum paper  
mark (1). The side to be printed on must  
be face down.  
1
11  
Chapter 2  
b Open the MP tray and lower it gently.  
Loading paper in the  
multi-purpose tray (MP tray)  
2
You can load up to 3 envelopes or special  
print media in the MP tray or up to 50 sheets  
of plain paper. Use this tray to print or copy on  
thick paper, bond paper, envelopes, labels or  
transparencies.  
Printing on thick paper, bond paper,  
envelopes, labels and transparencies  
2
c Pull out the MP tray support (1) and  
Before loading, press the corners and sides  
of the envelopes to make them as flat as  
possible.  
unfold the flap (2).  
When the back output tray is pulled down, the  
machine has a straight paper path from the  
MP tray through to the back of the machine.  
Use this paper feed and output method when  
you want to print on thick paper, bond paper,  
envelopes, labels or transparencies.  
1
d While pressing the paper side guide  
release lever, slide the paper guides to  
fit the width of the paper that you are  
going to use.  
IMPORTANT  
Remove each printed sheet or envelope  
immediately to prevent a paper jam.  
IMPORTANT  
Make sure the paper guides touch the  
sides of the paper so it will feed properly.  
a Open the back cover (back output tray).  
12  
   
Loading paper and documents  
e Put the envelopes (up to 3), thick paper,  
labels or transparencies in the MP tray  
with the top edge first and the print side  
face up. Make sure that the paper stays  
under the maximum paper mark (b).  
2
13  
Chapter 2  
Unprintable area  
2
Unprintable area for faxes and copies  
2
The figures below show unprintable areas.  
2
2
Usage  
Fax  
Document Size Top (1)  
Bottom (1)  
Left (2)  
1
Right(2)  
Letter  
A4  
0.12 in.(3 mm)  
0.12 in.(3 mm)  
0.12 in.(3 mm)  
0.12 in.(3 mm)  
0.16 in.(4 mm)  
0.16 in.(4 mm)  
0.16 in.(4 mm)  
0.08 in.(2mm)  
Copy  
Letter  
A4  
1
Note  
This unprintable area shown above is for a single copy or a 1 in 1 copy using Letter size paper.  
The unprintable area changes with the paper size.  
Unprintable area when printing from a computer  
2
When using the driver the printable area is smaller than the paper size, as shown below.  
Portrait  
Landscape  
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
®
®
Windows printer driver and  
BRScript Driver for Windows  
®
®
Macintosh printer driver  
and Macintosh  
Portrait  
1
2
1
2
0.16 in. (4.23 mm)  
0.25 in. (6.35 mm)  
0.16 in. (4.23 mm)  
0.2 in. (5.08 mm)  
0.16 in. (4.23 mm)  
0.16 in. (4.23 mm)  
0.16 in. (4.23 mm)  
0.16 in. (4.23 mm)  
Landscape  
Note  
The unprintable area shown above is for Letter size paper. The unprintable area changes with  
the paper size.  
14  
 
Loading paper and documents  
Recommended paper and  
print media  
Acceptable paper and  
other print media  
2
2
To get the best print quality, we suggest using  
the following paper.  
Print quality may vary according to the type of  
paper you are using.  
2
You can use the following types of print  
media: thin paper, plain paper, thick paper,  
bond paper, recycled paper, transparencies,  
labels or envelopes.  
Paper Type  
Item  
Plain Paper  
Xerox 4200DP 20 lb  
Hammermill Laser Print  
2
(24 lb=90 g/m )  
For best results, follow the instructions below:  
Use paper made for plain paper copying.  
Use paper that is 16 to 28 lb (60 to  
Recycled Paper No specific brand  
recommended  
Transparency  
Labels  
3M CG3300  
2
105 g/m ).  
Avery laser labels white  
#5160  
Use labels and transparencies which are  
Envelope  
No specific brand  
recommended  
designed for use in laser machines.  
DO NOT put different types of paper in the  
paper tray at the same time because it  
may cause paper jams or misfeeds.  
For proper printing, you must choose the  
same paper size from your software  
application as the paper in the tray.  
Avoid touching the printed surface of the  
paper immediately after printing.  
When you use transparencies remove  
each sheet immediately to prevent  
smudging or paper jams.  
Use long grain paper with a neutral Ph  
value, and a moisture content of approx.  
5%.  
15  
         
Chapter 2  
Optional lower tray (LT-5300)  
2
Type and size of paper  
2
The optional lower tray can hold up to 250  
sheets of Letter/A4, Legal and Folio size  
The machine loads paper from the installed  
standard paper tray, optional lower tray or  
multi-purpose tray.  
2
paper (20 lb or 80 g/m ). Paper can be loaded  
up to the top line of the maximum paper mark  
on the sliding paper width guide.  
Standard paper tray  
2
Since the standard paper tray is a universal  
type, you can use any of the paper sizes (one  
paper type and size at a time) listed in the  
on page 16. The standard paper tray can  
hold up to 250 sheets of Letter/A4, Legal or  
The name for the paper trays in the  
printer driver in this Guide are as  
follows:  
2
Tray and optional unit  
Standard paper tray  
Optional lower tray  
Multi-purpose tray  
Name  
Tray 1  
Tray 2  
MP tray  
2
Folio size paper (20 lb or 80 g/m ). Paper can  
be loaded up to the maximum paper mark on  
the sliding paper width guide.  
Multi-purpose tray (MP tray)  
2
The MP tray can hold up to 50 sheets of plain  
2
paper 16-43 lb (60-163 g/m ) or up to 3  
envelopes. Paper can be loaded up to the  
maximum paper mark on the sliding paper  
width guide.  
Paper capacity of the paper trays  
2
Paper size  
Paper types  
No. of sheets  
Paper Tray  
(Tray #1)  
A4, Letter, Legal,  
Executive, A5, A5 (Long Bond paper and  
Edge), A6, B5, B6 and  
Plain paper, Thin paper, up to 250  
2
20 lb (80 g/m )  
Recycled paper  
Transparency  
Folio .  
up to 10  
Multi-purpose tray  
(MP tray)  
Width: 2.75 to 8.5 in.  
(69.8 to 216 mm)  
Plain paper, Thin paper, up to 50  
2
Thick paper, Bond  
paper, Recycled paper,  
Envelopes and Labels.  
20 lb (80 g/m )  
Length: 4.57 to 16 in.  
(116 to 406.4 mm)  
up to 3 (envelopes)  
Transparency  
up to 10  
Paper Tray  
(Tray #2)  
A4, Letter, Legal,  
Executive, A5, B5, B6  
Thin paper, Plain paper, up to 250  
2
Bond paper and  
Recycled paper  
20 lb (80 g/m )  
and Folio .  
1
Folio size is 8.5 in. × 13 in. (215.9 mm x 330.2 mm)  
16  
           
Loading paper and documents  
Recommended paper specifications  
2
The following paper specifications are suitable for this machine.  
2
Basis weight  
20-24 lb (75-90 g/m )  
80-110 µm  
Thickness  
Roughness  
Stiffness  
2
Higher than 20 sec.  
3
90-150 cm /100  
Grain direction  
Long grain  
9
11  
Volume resistivity  
10e -10e ohm  
9
12  
Surface resistivity  
Filler  
10e -10e ohm-cm  
CaCO (Neutral)  
3
Ash content  
Brightness  
Opacity  
Below 23 wt%  
Higher than 80%  
Higher than 85%  
Handling and using special  
paper  
2
The machine is designed to work well with  
most types of xerographic and bond paper.  
However, some paper variables may have an  
effect on print quality or handling reliability.  
Always test samples of paper before  
purchasing to ensure desirable performance.  
Store paper in its original packaging and keep  
it sealed. Keep the paper flat and away from  
moisture, direct sunlight and heat.  
Some important guidelines when selecting  
paper are:  
Do not use inkjet paper because it may  
cause a paper jam or damage your  
machine.  
Preprinted paper must use ink that can  
withstand the temperature of the  
machine’s fusing process (200 degrees  
centigrade).  
If you use bond paper, paper having a  
rough surface or paper that is wrinkled or  
creased, the paper may exhibit degraded  
performance.  
17  
   
Chapter 2  
Types of paper to avoid  
2
Envelopes  
2
Most envelopes will be suitable for your  
machine. However, some envelopes may  
have feed and print-quality problems  
IMPORTANT  
Some types of paper may not perform well  
or may cause damage to your machine.  
because of the way they have been made. A  
suitable envelope should have edges with  
straight, well-creased folds and the leading  
edge should not be thicker than two sheets of  
paper. The envelope should lie flat and not be  
of baggy or flimsy construction. You should  
buy quality envelopes from a supplier who  
understands that you will be using the  
envelopes in a laser machine.  
DO NOT use paper:  
• that is highly textured  
• that is extremely smooth or shiny  
• that is curled or warped  
1
Envelopes can only be fed from the MP tray.  
Do not print envelopes using duplex printing.  
We recommend that you print a test envelope  
to make sure the print results are what you  
want before you print or purchase a large  
quantity of envelopes.  
1
1
0.08 in. (2mm)  
• that is coated or has a chemical finish  
• that is damaged, creased or folded  
Check the following:  
Envelopes should have a lengthwise  
• that exceeds the recommended weight  
specification in this guide  
sealing flap.  
The sealing flaps should be folded crisply  
and correctly (irregularly cut or folded  
envelopes may cause paper jams).  
• with tabs and staples  
• with letterheads using low temperature  
dyes or thermography  
Envelopes should consist of two layers of  
• that is multipart or carbonless  
paper in the area circled in figure below.  
• that is designed for inkjet printing  
If you use any of the types of paper listed  
above, they may damage your machine.  
This damage is not covered under any  
Brother warranty or service agreement.  
1
1
1
Feeding direction  
Envelope joints that are sealed by the  
manufacturer should be secure.  
We recommend that you do not print  
within 0.6 in. (15 mm) of the edges of  
envelopes.  
18  
 
Loading paper and documents  
• with sealing flaps that have not been  
folded at purchase  
Types of envelopes to avoid  
2
IMPORTANT  
DO NOT use envelopes:  
• with sealing flaps as shown in figure  
below  
• that are damaged, curled, wrinkled or  
an unusual shape  
2
• that are extremely shiny or textured  
• with clasps, staples, snaps or tie  
strings  
• with each side folded as shown in  
figure below  
• with self-adhesive closures  
• that are of a baggy construction  
• that are not sharply creased  
• that are embossed (have raised writing  
on them)  
• that were previously printed by a laser  
machine  
If you use any of the types of envelopes  
listed above, they may damage your  
machine. This damage is not covered  
under any Brother warranty or service  
agreement.  
• that are pre-printed on the inside  
• that cannot be arranged neatly when  
stacked  
• that are made of paper that weighs  
more than the paper weight  
specifications for the machine  
Occasionally you may experience paper  
feed problems caused by the thickness,  
size and flap shape of the envelopes you  
are using.  
• with edges that are not straight or  
consistently square  
• with windows, holes, cut-outs or  
perforations  
• with glue on surface as shown in figure  
below  
• with double flaps as shown in figure  
below  
19  
 
Chapter 2  
Labels  
2
The machine will print on most types of labels  
designed for use with a laser machine. Labels  
should have an adhesive that is acrylic-based  
since this material is more stable at the high  
temperatures in the fuser unit. Adhesives  
should not come in contact with any part of  
the machine, because the label stock may  
stick to the drum unit or rollers and cause  
jams and print quality problems. No adhesive  
should be exposed between the labels.  
Labels should be arranged so that they cover  
the entire length and width of the sheet. Using  
labels with spaces may result in labels  
peeling off and causing serious jams or print  
problems.  
All labels used in this machine must be able  
to withstand a temperature of 392 degrees  
Fahrenheit (200 degrees centigrade) for a  
period of 0.1 seconds.  
Label sheets should not exceed the paper  
weight specifications described in this User’s  
Guide. Labels exceeding this specification  
may not feed or print properly and may cause  
damage to your machine.  
Labels can be fed from the MP Tray.  
Types of labels to avoid  
2
Do not use labels that are damaged, curled,  
wrinkled or an unusual shape.  
IMPORTANT  
Avoid feeding labels with the carrier sheet  
exposed because your machine will be  
damaged.  
20  
 
Loading paper and documents  
a Unfold the ADF document output  
support flap (1) and the ADF support  
flap (2).  
Loading documents  
2
Using the automatic  
2
document feeder (ADF)  
2
2
The ADF can hold up to 50 pages and feeds  
each sheet individually. Use standard 20 lb  
2
(80 g/m ) paper and always fan the pages  
before putting them in the ADF.  
1
Recommended environment  
2
b Fan the pages well.  
Temperature: 68° F to 86° F (20 to 30° C)  
Humidity: 50% - 70%  
c Place your document face up, top edge  
first in the ADF until you feel it touch the  
feed roller.  
Paper: Xerox 4200 (20 lb/Letter)  
IMPORTANT  
• DO NOT leave thick documents on the  
scanner glass. If you do this, the ADF may  
jam.  
d Adjust the paper guides (1) to fit the  
width of your document.  
• DO NOT use paper that is curled,  
wrinkled, folded, ripped, stapled, paper-  
clipped, pasted or taped.  
• DO NOT use cardboard, newspaper or  
fabric.  
1
• To avoid damaging your machine while  
using the ADF, DO NOT pull on the  
document while it is feeding.  
Note  
To scan non-standard documents see  
Make sure documents written with ink are  
completely dry.  
Documents to be faxed must be from 5.8  
to 8.5 in. (148 to 215.9 mm) wide and from  
5.8 to 14 in. (148 to 355.6 mm) long, and  
2
of a standard weight [20 lb (80 g/m )].  
21  
   
Chapter 2  
Using the scanner glass  
2
You can use the scanner glass to fax, copy or  
scan pages of a book or one page at a time.  
Documents can be up to 8.5 in. wide and  
14 in. long (215.9 mm wide and 355.6 mm  
long).  
Note  
To use the scanner glass, the ADF must  
be empty.  
a Lift the document cover.  
b Using the document guidelines on the  
left, center the document face down on  
the scanner glass.  
c Close the document cover.  
IMPORTANT  
If the document is a book or is thick do not  
slam the cover or press on it.  
22  
   
General Setup  
3
3
Mode Timer  
3
Paper settings  
3
The machine has three mode keys on the  
control panel: Fax, Scan, and Copy.  
Paper Type  
3
You can set how much time the machine  
takes after the last Copy or Scan operation to  
return to Fax mode. If you choose Off, the  
machine will stay in the mode you used last.  
Set up the machine for the type of paper you  
are using. This will give you the best print  
quality.  
3
a Do one of the following:  
This setting also sets the time the machine  
will change from individual user to the Public  
user when using Secure Function Lock. (See  
To set the paper type for the  
MP Tray press Menu, 1, 2, 1, 1.  
To set the paper type for Tray#1  
press Menu, 1, 2, 1, 2.  
To set the paper type for Tray#2  
press Menu, 1, 2, 1, 3 if you installed  
the optional tray.  
a Press Menu, 1, 1.  
1
Tray#2 Only or T2 appears only if the  
optional tray is installed.  
11.Mode Timer  
a
2 Mins  
5 Mins  
Off  
21.Paper Type  
1.MP Tray  
b
a
Plain  
Thick  
Select ab or OK  
b
Select ab or OK  
b Press a or b to choose 0 Sec,  
30 Secs, 1 Min, 2 Mins, 5 Mins or  
b Press a or b to choose Thin, Plain,  
Thick, Thicker, Transparency or  
Recycled Paper.  
Off.  
Press OK.  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
You can choose Transparency for Tray #1  
and the MP Tray.  
23  
         
Chapter 3  
A5 L and A6 size are not available for the  
optional Tray #2.  
Paper Size  
3
You can use ten sizes of paper for printing  
copies: Letter, Legal, Executive, A5, A5 L,  
A6, B5, B6, Folio and A4 and four sizes for  
printing faxes: A4, Letter, Legal or  
Folio (8.5"×13").  
• If you chose Transparency for the  
Paper Type you will only be able to  
choose Letter, Legal, Folio or A4  
size paper in step b.  
When you change the size of paper in the  
tray, you will also need to change the setting  
for paper size at the same time so your  
machine can fit the document or an incoming  
fax on the page.  
Tray Use in copy mode  
3
You can change the priority tray that the  
machine will use for printing copies.  
When you choose Tray#1 Only, MP Only  
a Do one of the following:  
or Tray#2 Only , the machine pulls the  
To set the paper size for the  
MP Tray press Menu, 1, 2, 2, 1.  
paper only from that tray. If the selected tray  
is out of paper, No Paper will appear on the  
LCD. Insert the paper in the empty tray.  
To set the paper size for Tray#1  
press Menu, 1, 2, 2, 2.  
To change the tray setting follow the  
instructions below:  
To set the paper size for Tray#2  
press Menu, 1, 2, 2, 3 if you installed  
the optional tray.  
a Press Menu, 1, 6, 1.  
16.Tray Use  
1.Copy  
1
Tray#2 Only or T2 appears only if the  
optional tray is installed.  
a
MP>T1  
T1>MP  
b
22.Paper Size  
1.MP Tray  
Select ab or OK  
a
Letter  
Legal  
b Press a or b to choose Tray#1 Only,  
b
Tray#2 Only , MP Only,  
Select ab or OK  
MP>T1>T2 or T1>T2 >MP.  
Press OK.  
b Press a or b to choose , Letter,  
Legal, Executive, A5, A5 L, A6, B5,  
B6, Folio, A4 or Any.  
1
Tray#2 Only or T2 appears only if the  
optional tray is installed.  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
Note  
• When loading the documents in the ADF  
and MP>T1>T2 or T1>T2>MP is selected,  
the machine looks for the tray with the  
most suitable paper and pulls paper from  
that tray. If no tray has suitable paper, the  
machine pulls paper from the higher  
priority tray.  
Any size appears only when you choose  
the MP tray.  
• If you choose Any for the MP Tray Paper  
Size: You must choose MP Only for the  
Tray Use setting. You cannot use the Any  
Paper Size selection for the MP tray when  
making N in 1 copies. You must choose  
one of the other available Paper Size  
selections for the MP tray.  
• When using the scanner glass, your  
document is copied from the higher  
priority tray even if more suitable paper is  
in another paper tray.  
24  
         
General Setup  
Tray Use in fax mode  
3
Tray Use in print mode  
3
You can change the default tray that the  
machine will use for printing received faxes.  
You can change the default tray the machine  
will use for printing from your computer.  
When you choose Tray#1 Only, MP Only  
a Press Menu, 1, 6, 3.  
or Tray#2 Only , the machine pulls the  
16.Tray Use  
3.Print  
paper only from that tray. If the selected tray  
is out of paper, No Paper will appear on the  
LCD. Insert the paper in the empty tray.  
a
MP>T1  
T1>MP  
3
b
Select ab or OK  
When you choose T1>T2 >MP, the machine  
pulls paper from Tray #1 until it is empty, then  
from Tray #2, and then from the MP tray.  
b Press a or b to choose Tray#1 Only,  
Tray#2 Only , MP Only,  
MP>T1>T2 or T1>T2 >MP.  
Press OK.  
When you choose MP>T1>T2 , the machine  
pulls paper from the MP tray until it is empty,  
then from Tray #1, and then from Tray #2.  
1
Tray#2 Only or T2 appears only if the  
optional tray is installed.  
Note  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
• You can use four sizes of paper for  
printing faxes: A4, Letter, Legal or Folio.  
When a suitable size is not in any of the  
trays received faxes will be stored in the  
machine’s memory and Size Mismatch  
will appear on the LCD. (For details, see  
Note  
• The setting in the printer driver will take  
priority over the setting made on the  
control panel.  
• If the control panel is set to  
Tray#1 Only, MP Only or  
• If the tray is out of paper and received  
faxes are in the machine’s memory,  
No Paper will appear on the LCD. Insert  
paper in the empty tray.  
Tray#2 Only and you choose  
Auto Select in the printer driver, the  
machine pulls the paper from that tray.  
1
Tray#2 Only appears only if the optional tray is  
installed.  
a Press Menu, 1, 6, 2.  
16.Tray Use  
2.Fax  
a
MP>T1  
T1>MP  
b
Select ab or OK  
b Press a or b to choose Tray#1 Only,  
Tray#2 Only , MP Only,  
MP>T1>T2 or T1>T2 >MP.  
Press OK.  
1
Tray#2 Only or T2 appears only if the  
optional tray is installed.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
25  
         
Chapter 3  
Speaker volume  
3
Volume settings  
3
You can choose a range of speaker volume  
levels, from High to Off.  
Ring volume  
3
a Press Menu, 1, 3, 3.  
You can choose a ring volume level from a  
range of settings, from High to Off.  
13.Volume  
3.Speaker  
While in Fax mode press or  
to adjust  
a
Med  
High  
the volume level. The LCD will show the  
current setting, and each key press will  
change the volume to the next level. The  
machine will keep the new setting until you  
change it.  
b
Select ab or OK  
b Press a or b to choose Off, Low, Med or  
High.  
Press OK.  
You can also change the ring volume through  
the menu:  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
You can also adjust the speaker volume with  
the control panel keys.  
a Press Menu, 1, 3, 1.  
13.Volume  
1.Ring  
a Press  
(Fax).  
a
Med  
High  
b
Select ab or OK  
b Press Hook.  
b Press a or b to choose Off, Low, Med or  
c Press or  
.
High.  
This setting will stay until you change it  
again.  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
d Press Hook.  
Beeper volume  
3
When the beeper is on, the machine will beep  
when you press a key, make a mistake, or  
after you send or receive a fax. You can  
choose a range of volume levels, from High  
to Off.  
a Press Menu, 1, 3, 2.  
13.Volume  
2.Beeper  
a
Med  
High  
b
Select ab or OK  
b Press a or b to choose Off, Low, Med or  
High.  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
26  
       
General Setup  
Automatic daylight  
savings time  
Ecology features  
3
3
Toner Save  
3
You can set the machine to change  
automatically for Daylight Savings Time. It  
will set itself forward one hour in the Spring,  
and back one hour in the Fall.  
You can save toner using this feature. When  
you set Toner Save to On, print appears  
lighter. The default setting is Off.  
3
a Press Menu 1, 4.  
a Press Menu, 1, 5, 1.  
14.Auto Daylight  
15.Ecology  
1.Toner Save  
a
b
On  
Off  
a
b
On  
Off  
Select ab or OK  
Select ab or OK  
b Press a or b to choose On or Off.  
Press OK.  
b Press a or b to choose On or Off.  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
We do not recommend Toner Save for  
printing Photo or Gray Scale images.  
27  
     
Chapter 3  
Sleep Time  
3
Turning off the scanner  
lamp  
3
The Sleep Time setting can reduce power  
consumption by turning off the fuser while the  
machine is idle.  
The scanner lamp stays on for 16 hours  
before automatically switching off to preserve  
the life of the lamp and reduce power  
consumption.  
You can choose how long the machine must  
be idle (from 000 to 240 minutes) before it  
goes into sleep mode. When the machine  
receives a fax, computer data, or makes a  
copy, the timer will be reset. The default  
setting is 05 minutes.  
To turn the scanner lamp off manually press  
the d and c keys simultaneously. The scanner  
lamp will remain turned off until the next time  
you use the scanning feature.  
While the machine is in sleep mode the LCD  
will display Sleep. When printing or copying  
in sleep mode, there will be a short delay  
while the fuser warms up.  
Note  
Turning the lamp off regularly will reduce  
the lamp’s life.  
a Press Menu 1, 5, 2.  
15.Ecology  
2.Sleep Time  
LCD Contrast  
3
005Min  
Enter & OK Key  
You can change the contrast to make the  
LCD look lighter or darker.  
b Enter the length of time the machine is  
a Press Menu, 1, 7.  
idle before entering sleep mode (000 to  
240).  
17.LCD Contrast  
Press OK.  
-nnonn+  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
Select d c & OK  
Note  
b Press d to make the LCD lighter. Or,  
press c to make the LCD darker.  
Press OK.  
To turn off sleep mode, press  
Secure/Direct and Job Cancel at the  
same time in step b. Press a or b to  
choose Off. Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
28  
         
General Setup  
Changing the prefix number  
3
Dial Prefix  
3
The Dial Prefix setting will automatically dial a  
predefined number before every fax number  
you dial. For example: If your telephone  
system requires a 9 to dial an outside number  
use this setting to automatically dial 9 for  
every fax you send.  
a (USA) Press Menu, 0, 5.  
(Canada) Press Menu, 0, 6.  
b Do one of the following:  
To change the prefix number, press  
1.  
3
To exit without making a change,  
press 2 and go to c.  
Setting up the prefix number  
3
c Enter a new prefix number using the dial  
pad (up to 5 digits), press OK.  
a (USA) Press Menu, 0, 5.  
(Canada) Press Menu, 0, 6.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
b Enter the prefix number (up to 5 digits)  
on the dial pad.  
Press OK.  
Note  
• You can use the numbers 0 to 9, #, l and  
!. (Press Hook to display “!”.)  
You cannot use ! with any other numbers  
or characters.  
If your telephone system requires a timed  
break recall (hookflash), press Hook to  
enter the break.  
• (Canada only) If the pulse dialing mode is  
on, # and l are not available to use.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
29  
         
Security features  
4
4
• Polling Receive is enabled only when both  
Fax Tx and Fax Rx are enabled.  
Secure Function Lock 2.0  
4
Secure Function Lock lets you restrict Public  
access to the following machine functions:  
Setting the password for the  
administrator  
PC Print  
USB Direct Print  
Copy  
4
The password you set in these steps is for the  
administrator. This password is used to set  
up users and to turn Secure Function Lock on  
Fax Tx  
Fax Rx  
Scan  
This feature also prevents users from  
changing the Default settings of the machine  
by limiting access to the Menu settings.  
a Press Menu, 1, 8, 1.  
18.Security  
1.Function Lock  
Before using the security features you must  
first enter an administrator password.  
New Passwd:XXXX  
Enter & OK Key  
Access to restricted operations can be  
enabled by creating a restricted user.  
Restricted users must enter a user password  
to use the machine.  
b Enter a four-digit number for the  
password using numbers 0-9.  
Press OK.  
Make a careful note of your password. If you  
forget it, you will have to reset the password  
stored in the machine. For information about  
how to reset the password call Brother  
Customer Service.  
c Re-enter the password when the LCD  
shows Verify:.  
Press OK.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
• Secure Function Lock can be set manually  
at the control panel or by using Web  
Based Management. We recommend  
using Web Based Management to  
configure this feature. For more  
information, see the Network User’s  
Guide on the CD-ROM.  
• Only administrators can set limitations  
and make changes for each user.  
• When Secure Function Lock is on, you  
can only use 1.Contrast and  
7.Coverpg Setup in the Fax menu.  
If Fax Tx is disabled, you cannot use any  
function in the Fax menu.  
30  
     
Security features  
Changing the password for  
the administrator  
Setting up the public user  
mode  
4
4
Public user mode restricts the functions that  
are available for Public users. Public users do  
not need to enter a password to access the  
features made available through this setting.  
You can set up one Public user.  
a Press Menu, 1, 8, 1.  
18.Security  
1.Function Lock  
a
b
Lock OffiOn  
Set Password  
Select ab or OK  
a Press Menu, 1, 8, 1.  
b Press a or b to choose Set Password.  
Press OK.  
18.Security  
4
1.Function Lock  
a
b
Lock OffiOn  
c Enter the registered four-digit password.  
Press OK.  
Set Password  
Select ab or OK  
b Press a or b to choose Setup ID.  
Press OK.  
d Enter a four-digit number for the new  
password.  
Press OK.  
c Enter the administrator password.  
Press OK.  
e If the LCD shows Verify: re-enter the  
new password.  
d Press a or b to choose Public.  
Press OK.  
Press OK.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
e Press a or b to choose Enable or  
Disable for Fax Tx.  
Press OK.  
After you have set PC Print, repeat this  
step for Fax Rx, Copy, Scan,  
USB Direct and PC Print.  
Press OK.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
31  
   
Chapter 4  
i Press Stop/Exit.  
Setting up restricted users  
4
Note  
You can set up users with restrictions and a  
password for functions that are available to  
them. You can set up more advanced  
restrictions, such as by page count or PC  
user login name, through Web Based  
Management. (For more information, see the  
Network User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.) You  
can set up to 25 restricted users with  
restrictions and a password.  
You cannot use the same name as  
another user’s name.  
a Press Menu, 1, 8, 1.  
18.Security  
1.Function Lock  
a
b
Lock OffiOn  
Set Password  
Select ab or OK  
b Press a or b to choose Setup ID.  
Press OK.  
c Enter the administrator password.  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose User01.  
Press OK.  
e Use the numeric keys to enter the user  
Press OK.  
f Enter a four-digit password for the user.  
Press OK.  
g Press a or b to choose Enable or  
Disable for Fax Tx.  
Press OK.  
After you have set PC Print, repeat this  
step for Fax Rx, Copy, Scan,  
USB Direct and PC Print.  
Press OK.  
h Repeat steps d to g for entering each  
additional user and password.  
32  
       
Security features  
Turning Secure Function  
Lock on/off  
Switching Users  
4
4
This setting allows you to switch between  
registered restricted users or Public mode  
when Secure Function Lock is turned on.  
If you enter the wrong password, the LCD will  
show Wrong Password. Re-enter the  
correct password.  
Changing to the restricted user Mode  
Turning Secure Function Lock on  
a Hold down Shift as you press  
Secure/Direct.  
a Press Menu, 1, 8, 1.  
Function Lock  
Change ID  
18.Security  
1.Function Lock  
4
a
Brother  
ABC  
a
b
Lock OffiOn  
b
Set Password  
Select ab or OK  
Select ab or OK  
b Press a or b to choose your name.  
Press OK.  
b Press a or b to choose Lock OffiOn.  
Press OK.  
c Enter your four-digit password.  
Press OK.  
c Enter your four-digit administrator  
password.  
Press OK.  
Note  
Turning Secure Function Lock off  
If you press a Mode key that is restricted,  
Access Denied will appear on the LCD  
and then the machine will ask your name.  
If you are a restricted user with access to  
this Mode, press a or b to choose your  
name and enter your four-digit password.  
a Press Menu, 1, 8, 1.  
18.Security  
1.Function Lock  
a
b
Lock OniOff  
Change ID  
Select ab or OK  
Changing to the Public Mode  
b Press a or b to choose Lock OniOff.  
Press OK.  
After a restricted user has finished using the  
machine, it will return to the Public setting  
within the same time as the Mode Timer  
setting (Menu, 1, 1). (See Mode Timer  
on page 23.) You can also exit from the  
restricted user mode by pressing the current  
Mode key you are in. Then the LCD will ask  
you Go to Public?  
c Enter your four-digit administrator  
password.  
Press OK.  
Press aor b to choose 1. Yes.  
Press OK.  
33  
     
Chapter 4  
Setting up the password  
4
Setting Lock  
4
Setting Lock lets you set a password to stop  
other people from accidentally changing your  
machine settings.  
a Press Menu, 1, 8, 2.  
18.Security  
2.Setting Lock  
Make a careful note of your password. If you  
forget it, you will have to reset the passwords  
stored in the machine. Please call your  
administrator or Brother Customer Service.  
New Passwd:XXXX  
Enter & OK Key  
b Enter a four-digit number for the  
password using numbers 0-9.  
Press OK.  
While Setting Lock is On, you cannot change  
the following settings without a password:  
Date/Time  
c Re-enter your password when the LCD  
shows Verify:.  
Station ID  
Press OK.  
Quick Dial settings  
Mode Timer  
Paper Type  
Paper Size  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
Volume  
Auto Daylight  
Ecology  
Tray Use  
LCD Contrast  
Setting Lock  
Secure Function Lock  
Dial Restriction  
34  
   
Security features  
Changing your Setting Lock  
password  
Turning Setting Lock on/off  
4
4
If you enter the wrong password when  
following the instructions below, the LCD will  
show Wrong Password. Re-enter the  
correct password.  
a Press Menu, 1, 8, 2.  
18.Security  
2.Setting Lock  
Turning Setting Lock on  
a
b
On  
Set Password  
a Press Menu, 1, 8, 2.  
Select ab or OK  
18.Security  
b Press a or b to choose Set Password.  
Press OK.  
2.Setting Lock  
4
a
b
On  
Set Password  
c Enter your four-digit password.  
Press OK.  
Select ab or OK  
b Press a or b to choose On.  
Press OK.  
d Enter a four-digit number for the new  
password.  
Press OK.  
c Enter your four-digit password.  
Press OK.  
e Re-enter your new password when the  
LCD shows Verify:.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
Press OK.  
Turning Setting Lock off  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
a Press Menu, 1, 8, 2.  
18.Security  
2.Setting Lock  
Password:XXXX  
Enter & OK Key  
b Enter your four-digit password.  
Press OK twice.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
35  
   
Chapter 4  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
Restricting dialing  
4
Speed Dial restriction  
a Press Menu, 2, 6, 3.  
4
This feature is to prevent users from sending  
a fax or call to a wrong number by mistake.  
You can set the machine to restrict dialing by  
using the dial pad, One Touch, Speed Dial or  
26.Dial Restrict.  
3.Speed Dial  
LDAP search .  
a
Off  
If you choose Off, the machine does not  
restrict any dialing method.  
b
Enter # twice  
Select ab or OK  
If you choose Enter # twice, the machine  
will prompt you to re-enter the number, and  
then if you re-enter the same number  
correctly, the machine will start dialing. If you  
re-enter the wrong number, the LCD will  
show an error message.  
b Press a or b to choose Off,  
Enter # twice or On.  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
If you choose On, the machine will restrict all  
fax sending and outbound calls.  
LDAP server restriction  
(MFC-8890DW only)  
4
1
LDAP search is not available for MFC-8480DN.  
a Press Menu, 2, 6, 4.  
Dial pad restriction  
4
26.Dial Restrict.  
4.LDAP server  
a Press Menu, 2, 6, 1.  
a
Off  
b
Enter # twice  
26.Dial Restrict.  
1.Dial Pad  
Select ab or OK  
a
Off  
b Press a or b to choose Off,  
Enter # twice or On.  
Press OK.  
b
Enter # twice  
Select ab or OK  
b Press a or b to choose Off,  
Enter # twice or On.  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
• The Enter # twice setting will not work  
if you use an external phone or press  
Hook before entering the number. You will  
not be asked to re-enter the number.  
One Touch restriction  
a Press Menu, 2, 6, 2.  
4
• You can not restrict dialing when you use  
Redial/Pause.  
26.Dial Restrict.  
2.One Touch Dial  
• If you chose On or Enter # twice, you  
can not use the Broadcasting feature and  
can not combine quick dial numbers when  
dialing.  
a
Off  
b
Enter # twice  
Select ab or OK  
b Press a or b to choose Off,  
Enter # twice or On.  
Press OK.  
36  
             
Sending a fax  
5
5
Sending a 2-sided fax from  
the ADF (MFC-8890DW)  
How to fax  
5
5
Entering fax mode  
5
You can send a 2-sided document from the  
ADF. To cancel a fax in progress press  
Stop/Exit.  
To enter fax mode press  
key will glow blue.  
(Fax), and the  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
.
Sending a single-sided fax  
from the ADF  
b Place your document in the ADF.  
c Press Duplex.  
5
Using the ADF to send your faxes is the  
easiest way. To cancel a fax in progress  
press Stop/Exit.  
d Dial the fax number. (See How to dial  
e Press Start.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
.
The machine will now scan and send your  
document.  
b Place your document face up in the  
ADF.  
Note  
c Dial the fax number. (See How to dial  
• Legal size 2-sided documents cannot be  
faxed from the ADF.  
d Press Start.  
• When the machine is ready to scan a  
The machine scans the pages into  
2-sided document the LCD shows  
Duplex in the lower right corner.  
for  
memory and then sends the document.  
Note  
If the Out of Memory message appears  
while scanning a document into memory,  
press Stop/Exit to cancel or Start to send  
the scanned pages.  
38  
             
Sending a fax  
Changing a 2-sided fax layout  
Sending a fax from the  
You need to choose the duplex scanning  
format before you send a fax. The format you  
choose will depend on the layout of your  
2-sided document.  
scanner glass  
5
You can use the scanner glass to fax the  
pages of a book, or a single page at a time.  
The documents can be up to Letter, A4, Legal  
or Folio size. Press Stop/Exit to cancel a fax  
in progress.  
a Press Menu, 1, 9, 3.  
19.Document Scan  
3.Duplex Scan  
a
Long edge  
Short edge  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
.
b
Select ab or OK  
b Place your document face down on the  
b Do one of the following:  
scanner glass.  
If your document is flipped on the  
Long edge, press a or b to choose  
Long edge.  
5
c Dial the fax number. (See How to dial  
d Press Start.  
Press OK.  
The machine starts scanning the first  
page.  
Long edge  
Portrait  
Landscape  
e After the machine scans the page, the  
LCD will prompt you to choose one of  
the options below:  
Flatbed Fax:  
Next Page?  
a
1.Yes  
2.No (Send)  
b
Select ab or OK  
If your document is flipped on the  
Short edge, press a or b to choose  
Short edge.  
Press 1 to send another page. Go to  
step f.  
Press 2 or Start to send the  
document. Go to step g.  
Press OK.  
Short edge  
Portrait  
f Place the next page on the scanner  
glass, press OK. Repeat steps e and f  
for each additional page.  
Landscape  
Flatbed Fax:  
Set Next Page  
Then Press OK  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
g Your machine will automatically send  
the fax.  
39  
       
Chapter 5  
Faxing A4/Legal/Folio size  
documents from the scanner  
glass  
Note  
When faxing multiple pages from the  
scanner glass, real time transmission  
should be set to Off. (See Real Time  
5
When faxing A4/Legal/Folio size documents,  
you need to set the scan glass size to A4or  
Legal/Folio otherwise a portion of your  
faxes will be missing.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 1, 9, 1.  
.
19.Document Scan  
1.Glass ScanSize  
a
Letter  
Legal/Folio  
b
Select ab or OK  
c Press a or b to choose A4 or  
Legal/Folio.  
Press OK.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
Canceling a fax in progress  
5
Press Stop/Exit to cancel the fax. If you  
press Stop/Exit while the machine is dialing  
or sending, the LCD will show as below:  
Clear Fax?  
a
b
1.Yes  
2.No  
Select ab or OK  
Press 1 to cancel the fax.  
40  
   
Sending a fax  
• If the Fax Resolution setting of the fax  
number you chose first is S.Fine and you  
enter a stored I-Fax number,  
Select Std/Fine will appear on the  
LCD. Press Stop/Exit. Press Resolution  
and choose Standard, Fine or Photo  
then re-enter the I-Fax number. If you  
want to enter other number, go back to  
step c.  
Broadcasting  
5
Broadcasting lets you send the same fax  
message to more than one fax number. You  
can include Groups, One Touch, Speed Dial  
numbers and up to 50 manually dialed  
numbers in the same broadcast.  
You can broadcast up to 390 different  
numbers. This will depend on how many  
groups, access codes or credit card numbers  
you have stored, and on how many delayed  
or stored faxes in memory.  
Canceling a Broadcast in  
progress  
5
Note  
5
While broadcasting you can cancel the fax  
currently being sent or the whole broadcast  
job.  
Use Search/Speed Dial to help you  
choose numbers easily.  
a Press Menu, 2, 7.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Load your document.  
.
The LCD will display the Broadcast job  
number followed by the fax number  
being dialed (for example,  
#001 0123456789) and the broadcast  
job number (for example,  
Broadcast#001).  
c Enter a number.  
Press OK.  
You can use either a One Touch, Speed  
Dial, a Group number, or a number  
manually entered using the dial pad.  
27.Remaining Jobs  
a #001 0123456789  
b Broadcast#001  
Select ab or OK  
d Repeat step c until you have entered  
all the fax numbers you want to  
broadcast to.  
b Press a or b to choose the job number  
you want to cancel.  
Press OK.  
e Press Start.  
c Press 1 to clear the job number or 2 to  
exit.  
After the broadcast is finished the machine  
will print a broadcast report to let you know  
the results.  
If you chose to only cancel the fax  
currently being sent in step b, the  
machine will ask you if you want to  
cancel the broadcast. Press 1 to clear  
the whole broadcast job or 2 to exit.  
Note  
• The scan profile of the One-Touch,  
Speed-Dial or Group number you chose  
first will be applied to the broadcast.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
41  
       
Chapter 5  
Electronic cover page  
5
Additional sending  
operations  
5
This feature will not work unless you have  
already programmed your Station ID. (See  
the Quick Setup Guide.)  
Sending faxes using multiple  
settings  
You can automatically send a cover page  
with every fax. Your cover page includes your  
Station ID, a comment, and the name (or  
number) stored in the One Touch or Speed  
Dial memory.  
5
Before you send a fax, you can change any  
combination of these settings: contrast,  
resolution, overseas mode, delayed fax timer,  
polling transmission, real time transmission  
or cover page settings.  
By choosing Next Fax:On you can also  
display the number of pages on the cover  
page.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
.
You can choose one of the following preset  
comments.  
After each setting is accepted, the LCD  
asks if you want to enter more settings:  
1.Comment Off  
2.Please Call  
3.Urgent  
22.Setup Send  
Other Settings?  
a
b
1.Yes  
2.No  
Select ab or OK  
4.Confidential  
Instead of using one of the preset comments,  
you can enter two personal messages of your  
own, up to 27 characters long. Use the chart  
on page 188 for help entering characters.  
b Do one of the following:  
To choose more settings, press 1.  
The LCD returns to the Setup Send  
menu so you can choose another  
setting.  
If you have finished choosing  
settings, press 2 and go to the next  
step for sending your fax.  
5.(User Defined)  
6.(User Defined)  
42  
     
Sending a fax  
For example, enter 0, 2 for 2 pages or 0,  
0 to leave the number of pages blank. If  
you make a mistake, press d or  
Clear/Back to back up and re-enter the  
number of pages.  
Composing your own comments  
5
You can set up two comments of your own.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 2, 8.  
.
Send a cover page for all faxes  
5
22.Setup Send  
You can set the machine to send a cover  
page whenever you send a fax.  
8.Coverpage Msg  
a
b
5.  
6.  
Select ab or OK  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 2, 7.  
.
c Press a or b to choose 5. or 6. to store  
your own comment.  
Press OK.  
5
22.Setup Send  
7.Coverpg Setup  
d Enter your own comment using the dial  
a
b
Next Fax:On  
Next Fax:Off  
Select ab or OK  
pad.  
Press OK.  
Use the chart on page 188 for help entering  
characters.  
c Press a or b to choose On (or Off).  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose a comment.  
Press OK.  
Send a cover page for the next fax  
5
If you want to send a cover page only for the  
next fax, your machine will ask you to enter  
the number of pages you are sending so it  
can be printed on the cover page.  
Using a printed cover page  
5
If you want to use a printed cover page that  
you can write on, you can print the sample  
page and attach it to your fax.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
.
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 2, 7.  
.
b Load your document.  
c Press Menu, 2, 2, 7.  
22.Setup Send  
22.Setup Send  
7.Coverpg Setup  
7.Coverpg Setup  
a
b
Next Fax:On  
Next Fax:Off  
Select ab or OK  
a
b
Next Fax:On  
Next Fax:Off  
Select ab or OK  
d Press a or b to choose Next Fax:On  
(or Next Fax:Off).  
c Press a or b to choose Print Sample.  
Press OK.  
Press OK.  
d Press Start.  
e Press a or b to choose a comment.  
Press OK.  
e After the machine print a copy of your  
cover page, press Stop/Exit.  
f Enter two digits to show the number of  
pages you are sending.  
Press OK.  
43  
         
Chapter 5  
Contrast  
5
Changing Fax Resolution  
5
For most documents the default setting of  
Auto will give the best results. It  
automatically chooses the suitable contrast  
for your document.  
The quality of a fax can be improved by  
changing the Fax Resolution. Resolution can  
be changed for the next fax or for all faxes.  
To change the Fax Resolution setting  
for the next fax  
If your document is very light or dark,  
changing the contrast may improve the  
quality of the fax.  
5
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Load your document.  
.
Use Dark to make the faxed document  
lighter.  
Use Light to make the faxed document  
darker.  
c Press Resolution, then a or b to choose  
the resolution.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
.
Press OK.  
b Load your document.  
c Press Menu, 2, 2, 1.  
To change the default Fax Resolution  
setting  
5
22.Setup Send  
1.Contrast  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 2, 2.  
.
a
Auto  
Light  
b
Select ab or OK  
22.Setup Send  
2.Fax Resolution  
d Press a or b to choose Auto, Light or  
a
b
Standard  
Fine  
Select ab or OK  
Dark.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose the resolution  
Note  
you want.  
Even if you choose Light or Dark, the  
machine will send the fax using the Auto  
setting if you choose Photo as the Fax  
Resolution.  
Press OK.  
Note  
You can choose four different resolution  
settings.  
Standard Suitable for most typed  
documents.  
Fine Good for small print and transmits a  
little slower than Standard resolution.  
S.Fine Good for small print or artwork  
and transmits slower than Fine resolution.  
Photo Use when the document has  
varying shades of gray or is a photograph.  
This has the slowest transmission time.  
44  
   
Sending a fax  
Sending in real time for all faxes  
5
Dual access  
5
You can dial a number, and start scanning the  
fax into memory—even when the machine is  
sending from memory, receiving faxes or  
printing PC data. The LCD will show the new  
job number.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 2, 5.  
.
22.Setup Send  
5.Real Time TX  
a
On  
Off  
The number of pages you can scan into the  
memory will vary depending on the data that  
is printed on them.  
b
Select ab or OK  
c Press a or b to choose On.  
Press OK.  
Note  
If you get an Out of Memory message  
while scanning the first page of a fax,  
press Stop/Exit to cancel scanning. If you  
get an Out of Memory message while  
scanning a subsequent page, you can  
press Start to send the pages scanned so  
far, or press Stop/Exit to cancel the  
operation.  
Sending in real time for the next fax  
only  
5
5
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 2, 5.  
.
22.Setup Send  
5.Real Time TX  
a
On  
Off  
Real Time Transmission  
5
b
Select ab or OK  
When you are sending a fax, the machine will  
scan the documents into the memory before  
sending. Then, as soon as the telephone line  
is free, the machine will start dialing and  
sending.  
c Press a or b to choose Next Fax:On.  
Press OK.  
If the memory is full, the machine will send the  
document in real time (even if  
Real Time TX is set to Off).  
Sometimes, you may want to send an  
important document immediately, without  
waiting for memory transmission. You can set  
Real Time TX to On for all documents or  
Next Fax:On for the next fax only.  
Note  
In Real Time Transmission, the automatic  
redial feature does not work when using  
the scanner glass.  
45  
     
Chapter 5  
Overseas Mode  
5
Delayed batch transmission  
5
If you are having difficulty sending a fax  
overseas due to a bad connection, then  
turning on Overseas Mode may help.  
Before sending the delayed faxes, your  
machine will help you economize by sorting  
all the faxes in the memory by destination and  
scheduled time.  
This is a temporary setting, and will only be  
active for your next fax.  
All delayed faxes that are scheduled to be  
sent at the same time to the same fax number  
will be sent as one fax to save transmission  
time.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
.
b Load your document.  
c Press Menu, 2, 2, 9.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 2, 4.  
.
22.Setup Send  
9.Overseas Mode  
22.Setup Send  
4.Batch TX  
a
b
On  
Off  
a
On  
Off  
Select ab or OK  
b
Select ab or OK  
d Press a or b to choose On or Off.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose On or Off.  
Press OK.  
Delayed Fax  
5
d Press Stop/Exit.  
You can store up to 50 faxes in the memory  
to be sent within a twenty four hour period.  
Checking and canceling  
waiting jobs  
5
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
.
Check which jobs are still waiting in the  
b Load your document.  
c Press Menu, 2, 2, 3.  
memory to be sent. If there are no jobs, the  
LCD will show No Jobs Waiting. You can  
cancel a fax job that is stored and waiting in  
the memory.  
22.Setup Send  
3.Delayed Fax  
a Press Menu, 2, 7.  
The number of jobs still to be sent will be  
displayed.  
Set Time=00:00  
Enter & OK Key  
d Enter the time you want the fax to be  
b Do one of the following:  
sent (in 24-hour format).  
Press a or b to scroll though the  
waiting jobs, press OK to choose a  
job, and then press 1 to cancel it.  
(For example, enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM)  
Press OK.  
Note  
Press 2 to exit without canceling.  
The number of pages you can scan into  
the memory depends on the amount of  
data printed on each page.  
c When you have finished, press  
Stop/Exit.  
46  
       
Sending a fax  
Sending a fax manually  
5
Out of memory message  
5
If you get an Out of Memory message  
while scanning the first page of a fax, press  
Stop/Exit to cancel the fax.  
Manual transmission  
5
Manual transmission lets you hear the  
dialing, ringing and fax-receiving tones while  
sending a fax.  
If you get an Out of Memory message  
while scanning a subsequent page, you will  
have the option to press Start to send the  
pages scanned so far, or to press Stop/Exit  
to cancel the operation.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Load your document.  
.
Note  
c Press Hook and listen for a dial tone.  
Or pick up the handset of the external  
telephone and listen for a dial tone.  
If you get an Out of Memory message  
while faxing and you do not want to delete  
your stored faxes to clear the memory,  
you can send the fax in real time. (See  
5
d Dial the fax number you want to call.  
e When you hear the fax tone, press  
Start.  
If you are using the scanner glass,  
press 1 to send a fax.  
f If you picked up the handset of an  
external telephone, replace it.  
Sending a fax at the end of a  
conversation  
5
At the end of a conversation you can send a  
fax to the other party before you both hang  
up.  
a Ask the other party to wait for fax tones  
(beeps) and then to press the Start or  
Send key before hanging up.  
b Make sure you are in Fax mode  
.
c Load your document.  
d Press Start.  
If you are using the scanner glass,  
press 1 to send a fax.  
e Replace the handset of an external  
telephone.  
47  
         
Receiving a fax  
6
6
Choose the correct Receive Mode  
6
The correct Receive mode is determined by the external devices and telephone subscriber  
services (Voice Mail, Distinctive Ring, etc.) you have (or will be using) on the same line as the  
Brother machine.  
Will you be using a Distinctive Ring number for receiving faxes?  
Brother uses the term "Distinctive Ring" but different telephone companies may have other names for this  
service such as Custom Ringing, RingMaster, Personalized Ring, Teen Ring, Ident-A-Ring, Ident-A-Call,  
Date Ident-A-Call, Smart Ring and SimpleBiz Fax & Alternate Number Ringing. (See Distinctive Ring  
on page 54 for instructions on setting up your machine using this feature.)  
Will you be using Voice Mail on the same telephone line as your Brother machine?  
If you have Voice Mail on the same telephone line as your Brother machine, there is a strong possibility  
that Voice Mail and the Brother machine will conflict with each other when receiving incoming calls. (See  
Voice Mail on page 54 for instructions on setting up your machine using this service.)  
Will you be using a Telephone Answering Device on the same telephone line as your Brother  
machine?  
Your external telephone answering device (TAD) will automatically answer every call. Voice messages are  
stored on the external TAD and fax messages are printed. Choose External TAD as your receive mode.  
Will you be using your Brother machine on a dedicated fax line?  
Your machine automatically answers every call as a fax. Choose Fax Only as your receive mode. (See  
Will you be using your Brother machine on the same line as your telephone?  
Do you want to receive voice calls and faxes automatically?  
The Fax/Tel receive mode is used when sharing the Brother machine and your telephone on the  
same line. Choose Fax/Tel as your receive mode. (See Fax/Tel on page 49.)  
Important Note: You can not receive voice messages on either Voice Mail or an answering  
machine when choosing the Fax/Tel mode.  
Do you expect to receive very few faxes?  
Choose Manual as your receive mode. You control the telephone line and must answer every call  
yourself. (See Manual on page 49.)  
To set the receive mode follow the instructions below:  
01.Receive Mode  
a
Fax Only  
Fax/Tel  
a Press Menu, 0, 1.  
b
External TAD  
Select ab or OK  
b Press a or b to choose the receive mode.  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
The LCD will display the current receive mode.  
48  
     
Receiving a fax  
Manual  
6
Using receive modes  
6
Manual mode turns off all automatic  
answering functions unless you are using the  
Distinctive Ring Receive feature.  
Some receive modes answer automatically  
(Fax Only and Fax/Tel). You may want to  
change the Ring Delay before using these  
modes. (See Ring Delay on page 50.)  
To receive a fax in Manual mode lift the  
handset of the external telephone or press  
Hook. When you hear fax tones (short  
repeating beeps), press Start, and then press  
2 to receive a fax. You can also use the Easy  
Receive feature to receive faxes by lifting a  
handset on the same line as the machine.  
Fax Only  
6
Fax Only mode will automatically answer  
every call as a fax.  
Fax/Tel  
6
Fax/Tel mode helps you automatically  
manage incoming calls, by recognizing  
whether they are fax or voice calls and  
handling them in one of the following ways:  
External TAD  
6
6
External TAD mode lets an external  
answering device manage your incoming  
calls. Incoming calls will be handled in the  
following ways:  
Faxes will be automatically received.  
Voice calls will start the F/T ring to tell you  
to pick up the line. The F/T ring is a fast  
double ring made by your machine.  
Faxes will be automatically received.  
Voice callers can record a message on the  
external TAD.  
(For more information see Connecting an  
49  
                 
Chapter 6  
F/T Ring Time  
(Fax/Tel mode only)  
Receive Mode settings  
6
6
Ring Delay  
6
When somebody calls your machine, you and  
your caller will hear the normal telephone ring  
sound. The number of rings is set by the Ring  
Delay setting.  
The Ring Delay setting sets the number of  
times the machine rings before it answers in  
Fax Only and Fax/Tel modes.  
If the call is a fax, then your machine will  
receive it; however, if it is a voice call the  
machine will sound the F/T ring (a fast  
double-ring) for the time you have set in the  
F/T Ring Time setting. If you hear the F/T ring  
it means that you have a voice caller on the  
line.  
If you have external or extension telephones  
on the same line as the machine, keep the  
Ring Delay setting of 4. (See Using external  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 1, 1.  
.
Because the F/T ring is made by the machine,  
extension and external telephones will not  
ring; however, you can still answer the call on  
any telephone. (For more information see  
21.Setup Receive  
1.Ring Delay  
a
03  
04  
b
Select ab or OK  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 1, 2.  
.
c Press a or b to choose 00, 01, 02, 03 or  
04 for how many times the line rings  
before the machine answers.  
Press OK.  
21.Setup Receive  
2.F/T Ring Time  
a
20 Secs  
30 Secs  
b
d Press Stop/Exit.  
Select ab or OK  
Note  
c Press a or b to choose how long the  
machine will ring to alert you that you  
have a voice call (20, 30, 40 or 70  
seconds).  
Choose 00 in step c to have the machine  
answer immediately.  
Press OK.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
50  
           
Receiving a fax  
Easy Receive  
6
Setting the Print Density  
6
You can adjust the Print Density setting to  
make your printed pages darker or lighter.  
If Easy Receive is On:  
6
The machine can receive a fax automatically,  
even if you answer the call. When you see  
Receiving on the LCD or hear a click on the  
phone line through the handset you are  
using, just replace the handset. Your  
machine will do the rest.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 1, 6.  
.
21.Setup Receive  
6.Print Density  
-nnonn+  
If Easy Receive is Off:  
6
Select d c & OK  
If you are at the machine and answer a fax  
call first by lifting an external handset, then  
press Start, and then press 2 to receive.  
c Press d to make the print darker.  
Or, press c to make the print lighter.  
Press OK.  
If you answered at an extension telephone  
press l51. (See Using external and  
6
d Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
• If this feature is set to On, but your  
machine does not connect a fax call when  
you lift an extension telephone handset,  
press the fax receive code l51.  
• If you send faxes from a computer on the  
same telephone line and the machine  
intercepts them, set Easy Receive to Off.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 1, 3.  
.
21.Setup Receive  
3.Easy Receive  
a
On  
Off  
b
Select ab or OK  
c Press a or b to choose On or Off.  
Press OK.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
51  
     
Chapter 6  
Duplex (2-sided) printing for  
Fax mode  
Additional receiving  
operations  
6
6
Your machine can automatically print  
received faxes onto both sides of the paper  
when Duplex is set to On.  
Printing a reduced incoming  
fax  
6
You can use A4, Letter, Legal or  
Folio (8”x13”) size of paper for this function.  
If you choose On, the machine automatically  
reduces each page of an incoming fax to fit on  
one page of A4, Letter, Legal or Folio size  
paper.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 1, 9.  
.
The machine calculates the reduction ratio by  
using the page size of the fax and your Paper  
Size setting (Menu, 1, 2, 2).  
21.Setup Receive  
9.Duplex  
a
On  
Off  
b
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 1, 5.  
.
Select ab or OK  
c Press a or b to choose On (or Off).  
Press OK.  
21.Setup Receive  
5.Auto Reduction  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
a
On  
Off  
b
Note  
Select ab or OK  
When you turn on Duplex the Auto  
Reduction feature is also turned on.  
c Press a or b to choose On or Off.  
Press OK.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
52  
     
Receiving a fax  
Setting the Fax Receive  
Stamp  
Printing a fax from the  
memory  
6
6
You can set the machine to print the received  
date and time in the top center of each  
received fax page.  
If you are using the Fax Storage feature  
(Menu, 2, 5, 1), you can still print a fax from  
the memory when you are at your machine.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 1, 8.  
.
a Press Menu, 2, 5, 3.  
25.Remote Fax Opt  
3.Print Fax  
21.Setup Receive  
8.Fax Rx Stamp  
a
On  
Off  
Press Start  
b
Select ab or OK  
b Press Start.  
c Press a or b to choose On or Off.  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
6
d Press Stop/Exit.  
Receiving faxes into memory  
when the paper tray is empty  
6
Note  
• The received time and date will not appear  
when using Internet Fax.  
As soon as the paper tray becomes empty  
during fax reception, the LCD shows  
No Paper and begins receiving faxes into  
the machine’s memory. Put some paper in  
the paper tray. (See Loading paper and print  
• Make sure you have set the current date  
and time in the machine.  
Receiving a fax at the end of a  
conversation  
The machine will carry on receiving the fax,  
with the remaining pages being stored in  
memory, if enough memory is available.  
6
At the end of a conversation you can ask the  
other party to send you a fax before you both  
hang up.  
Further incoming faxes will also be stored into  
memory until the memory is full. When the  
memory is full the machine will stop  
automatically answering calls. To print the  
faxes, put fresh paper in the tray.  
a Ask the other party to place the  
document in their machine and to press  
the Start or Send key.  
b When you hear the CNG tones (slowly  
repeating beeps), press Start.  
c Press 2 to receive a fax.  
d Replace the external handset.  
53  
       
Telephone services and external  
devices  
7
7
Typically, the original number rings with the  
Telephone line  
services  
standard ring pattern and is used for  
receiving voice calls, and the second number  
rings with a different ring pattern and is used  
for receiving faxes. (See Distinctive Ring  
7
Voice Mail  
7
OR  
If you have Voice Mail on the same telephone  
line as your Brother machine, Voice Mail and  
the Brother machine will conflict with each  
other when receiving incoming calls.  
Set your Brother machine’s Receive Mode to  
"Manual". Manual Mode requires that you  
answer every incoming call if you want to be  
able to receive a fax. If the incoming call is a  
telephone call, then complete the call as you  
normally would. If you hear fax sending tones  
you must transfer the call to the Brother  
telephones on page 60. Unanswered fax and  
voice calls will go to your Voice Mail. (To set  
the machine in MANUAL Mode, see Choose  
For example, if your Voice Mail is set to  
answer after 4 rings and your Brother  
machine is set to answer after 2 rings, then  
your Brother machine will answer first. This  
will prevent callers from being able to leave a  
message in your Voice Mail.  
Similarly, if your Brother machine is set to  
answer after 4 rings and your Voice Mail is set  
to answer after 2 rings, then your Voice Mail  
will answer first. This will prevent your Brother  
machine from being able to receive an  
incoming fax, since Voice Mail cannot  
transfer the incoming fax back to the Brother  
machine.  
Distinctive Ring  
7
Brother uses the term ‘Distinctive Ring’ but  
different telephone companies may have  
other names for this service such as Custom  
Ringing, Personalized Ring, RingMaster,  
Smart Ring, Teen Ring, Ident-A-Call,  
Data Ident-A-Call, Ident-A-Ring, SimpleBiz  
Fax & Alternate Number Ringing.  
To avoid conflicts between your Brother  
machine and your Voice Mail service, do one  
of the following:  
Get the Distinctive Ring service from your  
telephone company. Distinctive Ring is a  
feature of your Brother machine that allows a  
person with one line to receive fax and voice  
calls through two different telephone  
numbers on that one line. Brother uses the  
term ’Distinctive Ring,’ but telephone  
companies market the service under a variety  
of names, such as Custom Ringing,  
Personalized Ring, Smart Ring, RingMaster,  
Ident-A-Ring, Ident-A-Call, Data Ident-A-Call,  
Teen Ring, and SimpleBiz Fax & Alternate  
Number Ringing. This service establishes a  
second telephone number on the same line  
as your existing telephone number, and each  
number has its own ring pattern.  
What does your telephone company’s  
‘Distinctive Ring’ do?  
7
Your telephone company’s Distinctive Ring  
service allows you to have more than one  
number on the same telephone line. If you  
need more than one telephone number, it  
is cheaper than paying for an extra line.  
Each telephone number has its own  
distinctive ring pattern, so you will know  
which telephone number is ringing. This is  
one way you can have a separate telephone  
number for your machine.  
Note  
Please call your telephone company for  
availability and rates.  
54  
           
Telephone services and external devices  
What does Brother’s ‘distinctive ring’  
do?  
Before you choose the ring pattern to  
register  
7
7
The Brother machine has a Distinctive Ring  
feature that allows you to use your machine to  
take full advantage of the telephone  
company’s Distinctive Ring service. The new  
telephone number on your line can just  
receive faxes.  
You can only register one Distinctive Ring  
pattern with the machine. Some ring patterns  
cannot be registered. The ring patterns below  
are supported by your Brother machine.  
Register the one your telephone company  
gives you.  
Note  
Ring  
Rings  
Pattern  
You must pay for your telephone  
company’s Distinctive Ring service before  
you program the machine to work with it.  
1
2
3
4
long-long  
short-long-short  
short-short-long  
Do you have Voice Mail?  
7
very long  
(normal pattern)  
If you have Voice Mail on the telephone line  
that you will install your new machine on,  
there is a strong possibility that Voice Mail  
and the machine will conflict with each other  
while receiving incoming calls. However, the  
Distinctive Ring feature allows you to use  
more than one number on your line, so  
both Voice Mail and the machine can work  
together without any problems. If each one  
has a separate telephone number, neither will  
interfere with the other’s operations.  
Note  
7
• Ring Pattern #1 is often called Short-Short  
and is the most commonly used.  
• If the ring pattern you received is not on  
this chart, please call your telephone  
company and ask for one that is  
shown.  
The machine will only answer calls to its  
If you decide to get the Distinctive Ring  
service from the telephone company, you will  
need to follow the directions below to  
‘register’ the new Distinctive Ring pattern  
they give you. This is so your machine can  
recognize its incoming calls.  
registered number.  
The first two rings are silent on the  
machine. This is because the fax must  
<<listen>> to the ring pattern (to compare  
it to the pattern that was ‘registered’).  
(Other telephones on the same line will  
ring.)  
Note  
You can change or cancel the Distinctive  
Ring pattern at any time. You can switch it  
off temporarily, and turn it back on later.  
When you get a new fax number, make  
sure you reset this feature.  
If you program the machine properly, it will  
recognize the registered ring pattern of the  
‘fax number’ within 2 ring patterns and  
then answer with a fax tone. When the  
‘voice number’ is called, the machine will  
not answer.  
55  
 
Chapter 7  
Registeringthedistinctive ringpattern  
Very important!  
Note  
7
If you do not want to receive faxes on your  
Distinctive Ring number, you can turn off  
Distinctive Ring. The machine will stay in  
Manual receive mode so you will need to  
set the Receive Mode again. (See Choose  
After you have set the Distinctive Ring feature  
to On, your Distinctive Ring number will  
receive faxes automatically. The receive  
mode is automatically set to Manual and you  
cannot change it to another receive mode  
while Distinctive Ring is set to On. This  
ensures the Brother machine will only answer  
the Distinctive Ring number and not interfere  
when your main telephone number is called.  
a Press Menu, 2, 0, 2.  
20.Miscellaneous  
2.Distinctive  
a
Off  
Set  
b
Select ab or OK  
b Press a or b to choose Set.  
c Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose the prestored ring  
pattern you want to use.  
Press OK.  
(You will hear each pattern as you scroll  
through the four patterns. Make sure  
you choose the pattern that the  
telephone company gave you.)  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
Distinctive Ring is now set to On.  
Turning off distinctive ring  
7
a Press Menu, 2, 0, 2.  
20.Miscellaneous  
2.Distinctive  
a
On  
Off  
b
Select ab or OK  
b Press a or b to choose Off.  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
56  
   
Telephone services and external devices  
Connecting an external  
TAD (telephone  
answering device)  
Note  
If you have problems receiving faxes,  
reduce the ring delay setting on your  
external TAD.  
7
You can connect an external Telephone  
Answering Device (TAD) to the same line as  
your machine. When the TAD answers a call,  
your machine will “listen” for the CNG (fax  
calling) tones sent by a sending fax machine.  
If it hears them it will take over the call and  
receive the fax. If it does not hear them, it will  
let your TAD take a voice message and the  
display will show Telephone.  
Connections  
7
The external TAD must be plugged into the  
back of the machine, into the jack labeled  
EXT. Your machine cannot work properly if  
you plug the TAD into a wall jack (unless you  
are using Distinctive Ring).  
The external TAD must answer within four  
rings (we recommend you set it to two rings).  
This is because your machine cannot hear  
the CNG tones until the external TAD has  
picked up the call. The sending machine will  
send CNG tones for only eight to ten seconds  
longer. We do not recommend using the toll  
saver feature on your external TAD if it needs  
more than four rings to activate it.  
a Plug the telephone line cord from the  
telephone wall jack into the back of the  
machine, in the jack labeled LINE.  
b Plug the telephone line cord from your  
external TAD into the back of the  
machine, in the jack labeled EXT. (Make  
sure this cord is connected to the TAD at  
the TAD’s telephone line jack, and not  
its handset jack.)  
7
Unless you are using Distinctive Ring, the  
TAD must be connected to the EXT. jack of  
the machine.  
c Set your external TAD to four rings or  
less. (The machine’s Ring Delay setting  
does not apply.)  
Before you connect an external TAD  
(telephone answering device), remove the  
protective cap (2) from the EXT. jack on the  
machine.  
d Record the outgoing message on your  
external TAD.  
e Set the TAD to answer calls.  
1
1
f Set the Receive Mode to  
External TAD. (See Choose the  
2
1
2
TAD  
Protective Cap  
57  
   
Chapter 7  
Two-line telephone system  
7
Recording an outgoing  
message (OGM)  
A two-line telephone system is nothing more  
than two separate telephone numbers on the  
same wall outlet. The two telephone numbers  
can be on separate jacks (RJ11) or combined  
into one jack (RJ14). Your machine must be  
plugged into an RJ11 jack. RJ11 and RJ14  
jacks may be equal in size and appearance  
and both may contain four wires (black, red,  
green, yellow). To test the type of jack, plug in  
a two-line telephone and see if it can access  
both lines. If it can, you must separate the line  
for your machine. (See Easy Receive  
7
a Record 5 seconds of silence at the  
beginning of your message. This allows  
your machine time to listen for fax tones.  
b Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.  
c End your 20-second message by giving  
your Fax Receive Code for people  
sending manual faxes. For example:  
“After the beep, leave a message or  
send a fax by pressing l51 and Start.”  
Note  
Converting telephone wall outlets  
7
We recommend beginning your OGM with  
an initial 5 second silence because the  
machine cannot hear fax tones over a loud  
voice. You may try leaving out this pause,  
but if your machine has trouble receiving,  
then you should re-record the OGM to  
include it.  
There are three ways to convert to an RJ11  
jack. The first two ways may require  
assistance from the telephone company. You  
can change the wall outlets from one RJ14  
jack to two RJ11 jacks. Or, you can have an  
RJ11 wall outlet installed and slave or jump  
one of the telephone numbers to it.  
The third way is the easiest: Buy a triplex  
adapter. You can plug a triplex adapter into  
an RJ14 outlet. It separates the wires into two  
separate RJ11 jacks (Line 1, Line 2) and a  
third RJ14 jack (Lines 1 and 2). If your  
Special line considerations  
7
Roll over telephone lines  
7
machine is on Line 1, plug the machine into  
L1 of the triplex adapter. If your machine is on  
Line 2, plug it into L2 of the triple adapter.  
A roll over telephone system is a group of two  
or more separate telephone lines that pass  
incoming calls to each other if they are busy.  
The calls are usually passed down or “rolled  
over” to the next available telephone line in a  
preset order.  
RJ14  
Your machine can work in a roll over system  
as long as it is the last number in the  
sequence, so the call cannot roll away. Do not  
put the machine on any of the other numbers;  
when the other lines are busy and a second  
fax call is received, the fax call would be  
transferred to a line that does not have a fax  
machine. Your machine will work best on a  
dedicated line.  
RJ11  
RJ14  
58  
       
Telephone services and external devices  
You can keep two-line telephones on other  
wall outlets as always. There are two ways to  
add a two-line telephone to the machine’s  
wall outlet. You can plug the telephone line  
cord from the two-line telephone into the  
L1+L2 jack of the triplex adapter. Or, you can  
plug the two-line telephone into the TEL jack  
of the two-line TAD.  
Installing machine, external two-line  
TAD and two-line telephone  
7
When you are installing an external two-line  
telephone answering device (TAD) and a  
two-line telephone, your machine must be  
isolated on one line at both the wall jack and  
at the TAD. The most common connection is  
to put the machine on Line 2, which is  
explained in the following steps. The back of  
the two-line TAD must have two telephone  
jacks: one labeled L1 or L1/L2, and the other  
labeled L2. You will need at least three  
telephone line cords, the one that came with  
your machine and two for your external two-  
line TAD. You will need a fourth line cord if  
you add a two-line telephone.  
Multi-line connections (PBX)  
7
We suggest you ask the company who  
installed your PBX to connect your machine.  
If you have a multi line system we suggest  
you ask the installer to connect the unit to the  
last line on the system. This prevents the  
machine being activated each time the  
system receives telephone calls. If all  
incoming calls will be answered by a  
Place the two-line TAD and the two-line  
telephone next to your machine.  
Plug one end of the telephone line cord for  
your machine into the L2 jack of the triplex  
adapter. Plug the other end into the LINE jack  
on the back of the machine.  
switchboard operator we recommend that  
you set the Receive Mode to Manual.  
7
We cannot guarantee that your machine will  
operate properly under all circumstances  
when connected to a PBX. Any difficulties  
with sending or receiving faxes should be  
reported first to the company who handles  
your PBX.  
Plug one end of the first telephone line cord  
for your TAD into the L1 jack of the triplex  
adapter. Plug the other end into the L1 or  
L1/L2 jack of the two-line TAD.  
Plug one end of the second telephone line  
cord for your TAD into the L2 jack of the two-  
line TAD. Plug the other end into the EXT.  
jack on the left side of the machine.  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Triplex Adapter  
Two Line Telephone  
External Two Line TAD  
Machine  
59  
   
Chapter 7  
For Fax/Tel mode only  
7
External and extension  
telephones  
7
When the machine is in Fax/Tel mode, it will  
use the F/T Ring Time (pseudo/double-  
ringing) to alert you to pick up a voice call.  
Using external and extension  
telephones  
Lift the external telephone’s handset, and  
then press Hook to answer.  
7
If you are at an extension telephone, you will  
need to lift the handset during the F/T Ring  
Time and then press #51 between the  
pseudo/double rings. If no one is on the line,  
or if someone wants to send you a fax, send  
Using extension telephones  
7
If you answer a fax call at an extension  
telephone, you can make your machine  
receive the fax by pressing the Fax Receive  
Code l51.  
the call back to the machine by pressing l51.  
If the machine answers a voice call and  
pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you  
can take the call at an extension telephone by  
pressing the Telephone Answer Code #51.  
Connecting an external or  
extension telephone  
7
You can connect a separate telephone  
directly to your machine as shown in the  
diagram below.  
Connect the telephone line cord to the jack  
labeled EXT.  
Using an external  
telephone(Connected to the EXT. jack  
of the machine)  
Before you connect the external telephone,  
remove the protective cap (3) from the EXT.  
jack on the machine.  
7
If you answer a fax call at the external  
telephone, you can make the machine  
receive the fax by pressing Start.  
1
2
If the machine answers a voice call and  
pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you  
can take the call at the external telephone by  
pressing Hook.  
If you answer a call and no one is on  
the line:  
7
You should assume that you’re receiving a  
manual fax.  
1
2
3
Extension telephone  
External telephone  
Protective Cap  
Press l51 and wait for the chirp or until the  
LCD shows Receiving, and then hang up.  
Note  
When you are using the external telephone,  
the LCD shows Telephone.  
You can also use the Easy Receive  
feature to make your machine  
automatically take the call. (See Easy  
60  
           
Telephone services and external devices  
Using a non-Brother cordless  
external handset  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu 2, 1, 4.  
.
7
If your non-Brother cordless telephone is  
connected to the EXT. jack of the machine  
(see page 60) and you typically carry the  
cordless handset elsewhere, it is easier to  
answer calls during the Ring Delay.  
21.Setup Receive  
4.Remote Codes  
a
On  
Off  
b
Select ab or OK  
c Press a or b to choose On (or Off).  
Press OK.  
If you let the machine answer first, you will  
have to go to the machine so you can press  
Hook to transfer the call to the cordless  
handset.  
d If you chose On in step c, enter the new  
Fax Receive Code.  
Press OK.  
Using Remote Codes  
7
e Enter the new Telephone Answer Code.  
Press OK.  
Fax Receive Code  
7
f Press Stop/Exit.  
If you answer a fax call on an extension  
telephone, you can tell your machine to  
receive it by pressing the Fax Receive Code  
l51. Wait for the chirping sounds then  
replace the handset. (See Easy Receive  
7
If you answer a fax call at the external  
telephone, you can make the machine  
receive the fax by pressing Start.  
Telephone Answer Code  
7
If you receive a voice call and the machine is  
in F/T mode, it will start to sound the F/T  
(double-ring) after the initial ring delay. If you  
pick up the call on an extension telephone  
you can turn the F/T ring off by pressing #51  
(make sure you press this between the rings).  
If the machine answers a voice call and  
pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you  
can take the call at the external telephone by  
pressing Hook.  
Changing the Remote Codes  
7
The preset Fax ReceiveCode is l51. The  
preset Telephone Answer Code is #51. If you  
are always disconnected when accessing  
your External TAD, try changing the three-  
digit remote codes, for example ### and 999.  
61  
           
Dialing and storing numbers  
8
8
Speed dialing  
8
How to dial  
8
Press Search/Speed Dial and Shift  
simultaneously and then the three digit  
Speed Dial number. (See Storing Speed Dial  
You can dial in any of the following ways.  
Manual dialing  
8
Use the dial pad to enter all the digits of the  
telephone or fax number.  
One touch dialing  
8
Press the One Touch key that stores the  
number you want to call. (See Storing  
Three-digit number  
Note  
If the LCD shows Register Now? when  
you enter a One Touch or Speed Dial  
number, it means that a number is not  
stored there.  
To dial One Touch numbers 21 to 40, hold  
down Shift as you press the One Touch key.  
62  
         
Dialing and storing numbers  
Search  
8
LDAP search (MFC-8890DW)  
8
You can search alphabetically for names you  
have stored in the One Touch and Speed Dial  
If the machine is connected to your LDAP  
server, you can search for information such  
as fax numbers and E-mail addresses from  
your server. (For details about how to set up  
LDAP see the Network User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.)  
a Press Search/Speed Dial.  
Fax redial  
8
b Press the dial pad keys for the first few  
letters of the name. (Use the chart on  
enter letters.)  
If you are sending a fax manually and the line  
is busy, press Redial/Pause, wait for the  
other fax machine to answer, and then press  
Start to try again. If you want to make a  
second call to the last number dialed, you can  
save time by pressing Redial/Pause and  
Start.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to scroll until you find the  
name you are looking for.  
Press OK.  
Redial/Pause only works if you dialed from  
the control panel.  
Note  
• If you are using LDAP names that are  
sored in the LDAP address book, a c will  
appear next to the names on the LCD.  
If you are sending a fax automatically and the  
line is busy, the machine will automatically  
redial one time after five minutes.  
8
• You can press Resolution to change the  
fax resolution.  
d Press Start.  
Note  
• If you do not enter a letter and press OK in  
step b, all registered names will appear.  
Press a or b to scroll until you find the  
name you are looking for. If you are using  
LDAP you must enter the letters of your  
search in step b.  
• If the LCD shows No Contact Found  
when you enter the first few letters of the  
name, it means that a name for the letter  
is not stored.  
63  
       
Chapter 8  
MFC-8480DN:  
8
Storing numbers  
8
a Press the One Touch key where you  
want to store the number.  
You can set up your machine to do the  
following types of easy dialing: One Touch,  
Speed Dial and Groups for Broadcasting  
faxes. You can also specify the default  
resolution for each One Touch and Speed  
Dial number. When you dial a quick dial  
number, the LCD shows the name, if you  
stored it, or the number. A scan profile can  
also be stored along with the fax number.  
If a number is not stored there, the LCD  
shows Register Now?.  
Press 1 to choose Yes.  
b Enter the phone or fax number (up to 20  
characters).  
Press OK.  
c Choose one of the options below:  
If you lose electrical power, the quick dial  
numbers stored in the memory will not be lost.  
Enter the name using the dial pad  
(up to 15 characters). Use the chart  
you enter letters.  
A scan profile is the resolution and other scan  
settings that you choose when you store a  
number. For example, you will be asked to  
select Standard, Fine, S.Fine or Photo if you  
have selected the Fax/Tel option. Or, you will  
be asked to select B&W 200 dpi,  
Press OK.  
Press OK to store the number  
without a name.  
B&W 200x100 dpi, Gray 100dpi,  
Gray 200dpi, Gray 300dpi,Color 100 dpi,  
Color 200 dpi, Color 300dpi or Color 600 dpi  
if you selected the E-Mail option.  
d If you want to save a fax resolution along  
with the number, choose one of the  
options below:  
To store the fax resolution, press a or  
b to select Std, Fine, S.Fine or  
Photo.  
Storing a pause  
8
Press Redial/Pause to insert a 3.5-second  
pause between numbers. You can press  
Redial/Pause as many times as needed to  
increase the length of the pause.  
Press OK.  
Press OK if you don’t want to change  
the default resolution.  
MFC-8890DW:  
8
Storing One Touch Dial  
numbers  
8
a Press the One Touch key where you  
want to store the number.  
Your machine has 20 One Touch keys where  
you can store 40 fax or telephone numbers  
for automatic dialing. To access numbers 21  
to 40, hold down Shift as you press the One  
Touch key.  
If a number is not stored there, the LCD  
shows Register Now?  
Press 1 to choose Yes.  
b Press a or b to select Fax/Tel, E-Mail  
or IFAX.  
Press OK.  
c Choose one of the options below:  
Enter the number (up to 20  
characters) if you selected Fax/Tel.  
Press OK.  
64  
         
Dialing and storing numbers  
Enter the E-mail address (up to 60  
characters) if you selected E-Mail  
or IFAX. Use the chart on Entering  
text on page 188 to help you enter  
letters.  
f Choose one of the options below:  
If you selected Black & White in step e,  
select the file format (TIFF, PDF or  
Secure PDF) that will be used to send to  
your PC. If you selected Gray or Color in  
step e, select the file format (PDF,  
Secure PDF, JPEG, or XPS) that will be  
used to send your PC.  
Press OK.  
Note  
Press OK.  
If you selected E-Mail and save the  
E-mail address, you can only use the  
E-mail address when you are in Scan  
mode. If you selected IFAX and save the  
E-mail address, you can only use the  
E-mail address when you are in Fax  
mode.  
Note  
• When you do a broadcast and you have  
saved a scan profile along with the  
number or E-mail address, the scan profile  
of the One-Touch, Speed-Dial or Group  
number you chose first will be applied to  
the broadcast.  
d Choose one of the options below:  
• You can also store the number by  
pressing Menu, 2, 3, 1.  
Enter the name using the dial pad  
(up to 15 characters).  
Press OK.  
Storing Speed Dial numbers  
8
Press OK to store the number or  
8
E-mail address without a name.  
You can store your frequently used numbers  
as Speed Dial numbers, so that when you dial  
you will only have to press a few keys  
(Search/Speed Dial, the three-digit number  
and Start). The machine can store 300  
Speed Dial numbers (001 - 300).  
e If you want to save a fax/scan resolution  
along with the number, choose one of  
the options below:  
If you selected Fax/Tel in step b,  
press a or b to select Std, Fine,  
S.Fine or Photo.  
MFC-8480DN:  
8
Press OK.  
a Hold down Shift as you press  
Search/Speed Dial and enter a three-  
digit Speed Dial location number  
(001-300).  
If you selected E-Mail in step b,  
press a or b to select Color100dpi,  
Color200dpi, Color300dpi,  
Color600dpi, Gray100dpi,  
Gray200dpi, Gray300dpi,  
If a number is not stored there, the LCD  
shows Register Now?  
Press 1 to choose Yes.  
B&W200dpi or B&W200x100.  
Press OK and then go to step f.  
b Enter the phone or fax number (up to 20  
If you selected IFAX in step b,  
press a or b to select Std, Fine or  
Photo.  
characters).  
Press OK.  
Press OK.  
Press OK if you don’t want to change  
the default resolution.  
65  
       
Chapter 8  
c Choose one of the options below:  
d Choose one of the options below:  
Enter the name using the dial pad  
(up to 15 characters). Use the chart  
you enter letters.  
Enter the name using the dial pad  
(up to 15 characters).  
Press OK.  
Press OK to store the number or  
Press OK.  
E-mail address without a name.  
Press OK to store the number  
e If you want to save a fax/scan resolution  
along with the number, choose one of  
the options below:  
without a name.  
MFC-8890DW  
8
If you selected Fax/Tel in step b,  
press a or b to select Std, Fine,  
S.Fine or Photo.  
a Hold down Shift as you press  
Search/Speed Dial and enter a three-  
digit Speed Dial location number  
(001-300).  
Press OK.  
If you selected E-Mail in step b,  
press a or b to select Color100dpi,  
Color200dpi, Color300dpi,  
Color600dpi, Gray100dpi,  
Gray200dpi, Gray300dpi,  
If a number is not stored there, the LCD  
shows Register Now?  
Press 1 to choose Yes.  
b Press a or b to select Fax/Tel, E-Mail  
or IFAX.  
B&W200dpi or B&W200x100.  
Press OK.  
Press OK and then go to step f.  
c Choose one of the options below:  
If you selected IFAX in step b,  
press a or b to select Std, Fine or  
Photo.  
Enter the number (up to 20  
characters) when you select  
Fax/Tel.  
Press OK.  
Press OK.  
Press OK if you don’t want to change  
the default resolution.  
Enter the E-mail address (up to 60  
characters) if you selected E-Mail  
or IFAX. Use the chart on Entering  
text on page 188 to help you enter  
letters.  
f If you selected Black & White in step e,  
select the file format (TIFF, PDF or  
Secure PDF) that will be used to send to  
your PC. If you selected Gray or Color in  
step e, select the file format (PDF,  
Secure PDF, JPEG or XPS) that will be  
used to send your PC.  
Press OK.  
Note  
Press OK.  
If you selected E-Mail and save the  
E-mail address, you can only use the  
E-mail address when you are in Scan  
mode. If you selected IFAX and save the  
E-mail address, you can only use the  
E-mail address when you are in Fax  
mode.  
Note  
• When you do a broadcast and you have  
saved a scan profile along with the  
number or E-mail address, the scan profile  
of the One-Touch, Speed-Dial or Group  
number you chose first will be applied to  
the broadcast.  
66  
       
Dialing and storing numbers  
• You can also store the number by  
pressing Menu, 2, 3, 2.  
Setting up Groups for  
Broadcasting  
8
If you often want to send the same fax  
message to many fax numbers you can set  
up a group.  
Changing One Touch and  
Speed Dial numbers  
8
Groups are stored on a One Touch key or a  
Speed Dial number. Each group uses up a  
One Touch key or a Speed Dial location. You  
can then send the fax message to all the  
numbers stored in a group just by pressing a  
One Touch key or entering a Speed Dial  
number, and then pressing Start.  
If you try to store a One Touch or Speed Dial  
number over an existing number, the LCD will  
show the name or number already stored  
there. If your machine has a scheduled job or  
you have set a fax forwarding number, the  
LCD will ask you if you want to change the  
number.  
Before you can add numbers to a group, you  
need to store them as One Touch or Speed  
Dial numbers. You can have up to 20 small  
groups, or you can assign up to 339 numbers  
to one large group.  
a Do one of the following:  
To change the stored number, press  
1.  
To exit without making a change,  
press 2.  
a Press Menu, 2, 3, 3.  
23.Address Book  
3.Setup Groups  
23.Address Book  
#005:MIKE  
8
a
1.Change  
2.Exit  
Group Dial:  
Press Speed Dial  
b
Select ab or OK  
b Choose an empty location where you  
want to store the group in one of the  
following ways:  
MFC-8480DN, go to c  
MFC-8890DW, go to b  
b (MFC-8890DW)  
Press a or b to select Fax/Tel, E-Mail  
or IFAX.  
Press a One Touch key.  
Hold down Shift as you press  
Search/Speed Dial and then enter  
the three-digit Speed Dial location.  
Press OK.  
c Enter a new number or character.  
Press OK.  
Press OK.  
c Use the dial pad to enter a group  
number (01 to 20).  
d Press d or c to position the cursor under  
the character you want to change, and  
then press Clear/Back to delete it.  
Repeat for each character you want to  
delete.  
Press OK.  
(MFC-8480DN) Go to step e.  
(MFC-8890DW) Go to step d.  
d (MFC-8890DW)  
Press a or b to select Fax/IFAX or  
E-Mail.  
e Follow the directions beginning in  
step d in Storing One-Touch dial  
numbers and Storing Speed-Dial  
Press OK.  
67  
         
Chapter 8  
e To add One Touch or Speed Dial  
If you selected E-mail in step d,  
press a or b to select Color100dpi,  
Color200dpi, Color300dpi,  
Color600dpi, Gray100dpi,  
Gray200dpi, Gray300dpi,  
numbers follow the instructions below:  
For One Touch numbers, press the  
One Touch keys one after the other.  
For Speed Dial numbers, hold down  
Shift as you press  
B&W200dpi or B&W200x100.  
Press OK.  
Search/Speed Dial, and then enter  
the three-digit Speed Dial location.  
Press OK if you don’t want to change  
the default resolution.  
The LCD will display your chosen One  
Touch numbers with a l and Speed Dial  
numbers with a # (for example l006,  
#009).  
Note  
If you have selected Fax/IFAX in step d  
and added One-Touch or Speed-Dial  
numbers that are stored as ‘I-Fax’, you  
cannot select S.Fine.  
f Press OK when you have finished  
adding numbers.  
g Do one of the following:  
j (MFC-8890DW)  
If you selected Black & White in step e,  
select the file format (TIFF, PDF or  
Secure PDF) that will be used to send to  
your PC. If you selected Gray or Color in  
step e, select the file format (PDF,  
Secure PDF, JPEG or XPS) that will be  
used to send your PC.  
Enter the name using the dial pad  
(up to 15 characters). Use the chart  
you enter letters.  
Press OK.  
Press OK to store the group without  
a name.  
Press OK.  
Go to step i.  
Dialing access codes and  
credit card numbers  
h (MFC-8480DN)  
8
If you want to save a fax resolution along  
with the number, choose one of the  
options below:  
You can combine more than one Quick Dial  
number when you dial. This feature may be  
useful if you need to dial an access code for  
a cheaper rate from another long distance  
carrier.  
To store the fax resolution, press a or  
b to select Std, Fine, S.Fine or  
Photo.  
Press OK.  
For example, you might have stored ‘555’ on  
Speed Dial #003 and ‘7000’ on Speed Dial  
#002. You can use them both to dial  
Press OK if you don’t want to change  
the default resolution.  
‘555-7000’ if you press the following keys:  
i (MFC-8890DW)  
Hold down Shift as you press  
Search/Speed Dial, 003.  
You can save a fax/scan resolution  
along with the number. Do one of the  
following:  
Hold down Shift as you press  
Search/Speed Dial, 002 and Start.  
If you selected Fax/IFAX in step d,  
press a or b to select Std, Fine,  
S.Fine or Photo.  
Numbers can be added manually by entering  
them on the dial pad:  
Press OK.  
68  
     
Dialing and storing numbers  
Hold down Shift as you press  
Search/Speed Dial, 003, 7001 (on the dial  
pad), and Start.  
This would dial ‘555-7001’. You can also add  
a pause by pressing Redial/Pause.  
Pause  
8
Press Redial/Pause to insert a 3.5-second  
pause between numbers. You can press  
Redial/Pause as many times as needed to  
increase the length of the pause.  
Tone or Pulse (Canada only)  
8
If you have a Pulse dialing service, but need  
to send Tone signals (for example, for  
telephone banking), follow the instructions  
below. If you have Touch Tone service, you  
will not need this feature to send tone signals.  
a Press Hook.  
8
b Press # on the machine’s control panel.  
Any digits dialed after this will send tone  
signals.  
When you hang up, the machine will  
return to the Pulse dialing service.  
69  
   
Remote Fax Options  
9
9
Remote Fax Options let you receive faxes  
while you are away from the machine.  
d Press a or b to choose On or Off.  
Press OK.  
You can use only one Remote Fax Option at  
a time.  
25.Remote Fax Opt  
Backup Print  
a
Off  
On  
b
Select ab or OK  
Fax Forwarding  
9
e Press Stop/Exit.  
The Fax Forwarding feature lets you  
automatically forward your received faxes to  
another machine.  
IMPORTANT  
If you choose Backup Print On, the  
machine will also print the fax at your  
machine so you will have a copy. This is a  
safety feature in case if there is a power  
failure before the fax is forwarded or a  
problem at the receiving machine. The  
machine can store faxes for  
a Press Menu, 2, 5, 1.  
25.Remote Fax Opt  
1.Fwd/Page/Store  
a
Off  
Fax Forward  
b
Select ab or OK  
approximately 60 hours if there is a power  
failure.  
b Press a or b to choose Fax Forward.  
Press OK.  
The LCD will ask you to enter the fax  
number you want your faxes to be  
forwarded to.  
c Enter the forwarding number using the  
dial pad (up to 20 digits), using a  
One Touch key or holding down Shift as  
you press Search/Speed Dial and the  
three-digit location.  
Press OK.  
Note  
• If you store a group on a One Touch key  
or a Speed Dial location, the faxes will be  
forwarded to several fax numbers.  
• You can also enter an E-mail address if  
your machine has been configured for the  
Internet Fax feature. (For details about  
Internet Fax, see the Network User’s  
Guide on the CD-ROM. For information  
about Fax Forward to E-mail, see the  
Brother Solutions Center at  
70  
   
Remote Fax Options  
Paging  
9
Fax Storage  
9
When Paging is chosen, the machine dials  
the cell phone or pager number you  
programmed. This activates your cell phone  
or pager so you will know that you have a fax  
message in the machine’s memory.  
The Fax Storage feature lets you store your  
received faxes in the machine’s memory. You  
can retrieve stored fax messages from a fax  
machine at another location using the remote  
retrieval commands. (See Retrieving fax  
automatically print a copy of the stored fax.  
a Press Menu, 2, 5, 1.  
25.Remote Fax Opt  
1.Fwd/Page/Store  
a Press Menu, 2, 5, 1.  
a
Off  
Fax Forward  
25.Remote Fax Opt  
1.Fwd/Page/Store  
b
Select ab or OK  
a
Off  
Fax Forward  
b
b Press a or b to choose Paging.  
Press OK.  
Select ab or OK  
b Press a or b to choose Fax Storage.  
Press OK.  
c Enter your cell phone or pager number  
followed by # # (up to 20 digits).  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
Do not include the area code if it is the  
same as that of your machine.  
For example, press  
1 8 0 0 5 5 5 1 2 3 4 # #  
9
d Do one of the following:  
If your pager needs a PIN, enter the  
PIN, press #, press Redial/Pause,  
enter your fax number followed by #  
#.  
Press OK  
(For example, press:1 2 3 4 5 #  
Redial/Pause 1 8 0 0 5 5 5 6 7 8 9 #  
#)  
If you do not need a PIN, press OK.  
If you are programming a cell phone  
number, press OK.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
• If you have set Paging, a backup copy will  
automatically be printed at the machine.  
• You cannot change a Paging or PIN  
number remotely.  
71  
   
Chapter 9  
d Press a or b to choose On or Off.  
PC Fax Receive  
9
25.Remote Fax Opt  
Backup Print  
If you turn on the PC Fax Receive feature  
your machine will store received faxes in  
memory and send them to your PC  
automatically. You can then use your PC to  
view and store these faxes.  
a
Off  
On  
b
Select ab or OK  
Press OK.  
Even if you have turned off your PC (at night  
or on the weekend, for example), your  
machine will receive and store your faxes in  
its memory. The LCD will show the number of  
stored faxes received, for example:  
PC Fax Msg:001  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
IMPORTANT  
If you choose Backup Print On, the  
machine will also print the fax at your  
machine so you will have a copy. This is a  
safety feature in case if there is a power  
failure before the fax is forwarded or a  
problem at the receiving machine. The  
machine can store faxes for  
When you start your PC and the PC Fax  
Receiving software runs, your machine  
transfers your faxes to your PC automatically.  
For PC Fax Receive to work you must have  
the PC-FAX Receive software running on  
your PC. (For details, see PC-FAX Receiving  
in the Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.)  
approximately 60 hours if there is a power  
failure.  
If you choose Backup Print On, the machine  
will also print the fax.  
Note  
• Before you can set up PC Fax Receive  
you must install the MFL-Pro Suite  
software on your PC. Make sure your PC  
is connected and turned on. (For details  
see PC-FAX Receiving in the Software  
User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
a Press Menu, 2, 5, 1.  
25.Remote Fax Opt  
1.Fwd/Page/Store  
a
Off  
Fax Forward  
b
Select ab or OK  
• If your machine has a problem and is  
unable to print faxes in memory, you can  
use this setting to transfer your faxes to a  
PC. (For details, see Error and  
b Press a or b to choose  
PC Fax Receive.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose (<USB> or  
<Parallel>), or your computer name  
if the machine is connected to a  
network.  
• PC Fax Receive is not supported in Mac  
OS. (See PC Fax receiving in the  
Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
25.Remote Fax Opt  
1.Fwd/Page/Store  
a
<USB>  
<Parallel>  
b
Select ab or OK  
Press OK.  
72  
 
Remote Fax Options  
If you press 2, faxes in the memory will not  
be erased or transferred to your PC and  
the setting will be unchanged.  
Changing Remote Fax  
Options  
9
The LCD will ask you the following message:  
If received faxes are left in your machine’s  
memory when you change to another  
Remote Fax Option, the LCD will ask you the  
following message:  
25.Remote Fax Opt  
Backup Print  
a
Off  
On  
b
Select ab or OK  
25.Remote Fax Opt  
Erase All Fax?  
Press a or b to choose On or Off.  
Press OK.  
a
1. Yes  
2. No  
b
Select ab or OK  
Press Stop/Exit.  
or  
IMPORTANT  
If you choose Backup Print On, the  
machine will also print the fax at your  
machine so you will have a copy. This is a  
safety feature in case if there is a power  
failure before the fax is forwarded or a  
problem at the receiving machine. The  
machine can store faxes for  
25.Remote Fax Opt  
Print All Fax?  
a
1. Yes  
2. No  
b
Select ab or OK  
If you press 1, faxes in the memory will be  
erased or printed before the setting  
approximately 60 hours if there is a power  
failure.  
changes. If a backup copy has already  
been printed it will not be printed again.  
9
If you press 2, faxes in the memory will not  
be erased or printed and the setting will be  
unchanged.  
Turning off Remote Fax  
Options  
9
If received faxes are left in the machine’s  
memory when you change to  
PC Fax Receive from another remote fax  
option (Fax Forward, Paging or  
Fax Storage), the LCD will ask you the  
following message:  
a Press Menu, 2, 5, 1.  
25.Remote Fax Opt  
1.Fwd/Page/Store  
a
Off  
Fax Forward  
b
25.Remote Fax Opt  
Send Fax to PC?  
Select ab or OK  
a
1. Yes  
2. No  
b Press a or b to choose Off.  
Press OK.  
b
Select ab or OK  
Note  
If you press 1, faxes in the memory will be  
sent to your PC before the setting  
The LCD will give you options if there are  
received faxes still in your machine’s  
changes. Faxes in the memory will be sent  
to your PC when the PC Fax Receive icon  
is active on your PC. (See the Software  
User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
73  
     
Chapter 9  
Using your Remote Access  
Code  
Remote retrieval  
9
9
The remote retrieval feature lets you retrieve  
your stored fax messages when you are not  
at the machine. You can call your machine  
from any touch tone telephone or fax  
machine, then use the Remote Access Code  
to retrieve your messages.  
a Dial your fax number from a telephone  
or another fax machine using touch  
tone.  
b When your machine answers,  
immediately enter your Remote Access  
Code (3 digits followed by l).  
Setting a Remote Access  
Code  
9
c The machine signals if it has received  
messages:  
The Remote Access Code feature lets you  
access the remote retrieval features when  
you are away from your machine. Before you  
use the remote access and retrieval features,  
you have to set up your own code. The  
default code is an inactive code: – – –l.  
No beeps  
No messages received.  
1 long beep  
Fax message received.  
a Press Menu, 2, 5, 2.  
d The machine gives two short beeps to  
tell you to enter a command (See  
The machine will hang up if you wait  
longer than 30 seconds before entering  
a command. If you enter an invalid  
command the machine will beep three  
times.  
25.Remote Fax Opt  
2.Remote Access  
Access Code:---*  
Enter & OK Key  
b Enter a three-digit code using the  
numbers 0 9, lor #.  
Press OK.  
e Press 9 0 to reset the machine when you  
have finished.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
f Hang up.  
Note  
Do not use the same code used for your  
Fax Receive Code (l51) or Telephone  
Answer Code (#51). (See Changing the  
Note  
If your machine is set to Manual mode,  
you can still access the remote retrieval  
features. Dial the fax number as normal  
and let the machine ring. After 100  
seconds you will hear a long beep to tell  
you to enter the remote access code. You  
will then have 30 seconds to enter the  
code.  
You can change your code at any time. If you  
want to make your code inactive, press  
Clear/Backand then OK in b to restore the  
inactive setting – – –l.  
74  
       
Remote Fax Options  
Retrieving fax messages  
9
Changing the Fax Forwarding  
number  
9
a Dial your fax number from a telephone  
or another fax machine using touch  
tone.  
You can change the default setting of your fax  
forwarding number from another telephone or  
fax machine using touch tone.  
b When your machine answers,  
immediately enter your Remote Access  
Code (3 digits followed by l). If you hear  
one long beep, you have messages.  
a Dial your fax number from a telephone  
or another fax machine using touch  
tone.  
b When your machine answers, enter  
your Remote Access Code (3 digits  
followed by l). If you hear one long  
beep, you have messages.  
c When you hear two short beeps, use the  
dial pad to press 9 6 2.  
d Wait for a long beep, and then use the  
dial pad to enter the number of the  
remote fax machine where you want  
your fax messages sent, followed by ##  
(up to 20 digits).  
c When you hear two short beeps, use the  
dial pad to press 9 5 4.  
d Wait for a long beep, and then use the  
dial pad to enter the new number of the  
remote fax machine where you want  
your fax messages forwarded followed  
by ## (up to 20 digits).  
e Hang up after you hear your machine  
beep. Your machine will call the other  
machine, which will then print your fax  
messages.  
e Press 9 0 to reset the machine when you  
Note  
9
have finished.  
You can insert a pause in a fax number by  
using the # key.  
f Hang up after you hear your machine  
beep.  
Note  
You can insert a pause in a fax number by  
using the # key.  
75  
       
Chapter 9  
Remote fax commands  
9
Follow the commands below to access features when you are away from the machine. When you  
call the machine and enter your Remote Access Code (3 digits followed by l), the system will give  
two short beeps and you must enter a remote command.  
Remote commands  
95 Change the fax forwarding,  
Operation details  
paging or fax storage settings  
1 OFF  
You can choose Off after you have retrieved or erased all your  
messages.  
2 Fax Forwarding  
3 Paging  
One long beep means the change is accepted. If you hear three  
short beeps, you cannot make the change because something  
has not been set up (for example, a fax forwarding or paging  
number has not been registered). You can register your fax  
forwarding number by entering 4. (See Changing the Fax  
Forwarding number on page 75.) Once you have registered the  
number, fax forwarding will work.  
4 Fax Forwarding number  
6 Fax Storage  
96  
Retrieve a fax  
2 Retrieve all faxes  
Enter the number of a remote fax machine to receive stored fax  
3 Erase faxes from the memory  
If you hear one long beep, fax messages have been erased  
from the memory.  
97  
98  
Check the receiving status  
1 Fax  
You can check whether your machine has received any faxes.  
If yes, you will hear one long beep. If no, you will hear three  
short beeps.  
Change the Receive Mode  
1 External TAD  
2 Fax/Tel  
If you hear one long beep, your change has been accepted.  
3 Fax Only  
90  
Exit  
Press 9 0 to exit remote retrieval. Wait for the long beep, then  
replace the handset.  
76  
   
Polling  
10  
10  
Polling lets you set up your machine so other  
people can receive faxes from you, but they  
pay for the call. It also lets you call somebody  
else’s fax machine and receive a fax from it,  
so you pay for the call. The polling feature  
needs to be set up on both machines for this  
to work. Not all fax machines support polling.  
Sequential polling  
10  
Sequential polling lets you request  
documents from several fax machines in one  
operation. Afterwards, a Sequential Polling  
Report will be printed.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 1, 7.  
.
Polling receive  
10  
Polling receive lets you call another fax  
machine to receive a fax.  
Polling RX  
Dial & Start  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 1, 7.  
.
c Specify the fax machines you want to  
poll by using One Touch, Speed Dial,  
Search, a Group or the dial pad. You  
must press OK between each location.  
Polling RX  
Dial & Start  
d Press Start.  
The machine polls each number or  
Group number in turn for a document.  
c Enter the fax number you are polling.  
Press Start.  
The LCD will show Dialing.  
10  
Press Stop/Exit while the machine is dialing  
to cancel the polling process.  
To cancel all sequential polling receive jobs,  
press Menu, 2, 7. (See Checking and  
77  
     
Chapter 10  
h Place the next page on the scanner  
glass, press OK. Repeat steps g and  
h for each additional page.  
Your machine will automatically send  
the fax.  
Polled transmit  
10  
Polled transmit lets you set up your machine  
to wait with a document so another fax  
machine can call and retrieve it.  
Note  
Setup for polled transmit  
10  
The document will be stored and can be  
retrieved from any other fax machine until  
you delete the fax from memory.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
.
To delete the fax from memory, press  
Menu, 2, 7. (See Checking and canceling  
b Load your document.  
c Press Menu, 2, 2, 6.  
22.Setup Send  
6.Polled TX  
a
On  
Off  
b
Select ab or OK  
d Press a or b to choose On (or Off).  
Press OK.  
e Press 2 to choose 2.No if you do not  
want to enter more settings when the  
LCD asks you the following message:  
22.Setup Send  
Other Settings?  
a
b
1.Yes  
2.No  
Select ab or OK  
f Press Start.  
g If you are using the scanner glass, the  
LCD will prompt you to choose one of  
the options below:  
Flatbed Fax:  
Next Page?  
a
1.Yes  
2.No (Send)  
b
Select ab or OK  
Press 1 to send another page.  
Go to step h.  
Press 2 or Start to send the  
document.  
78  
       
Printing reports  
11  
11  
Fax reports  
11  
Note  
• If you choose On+Image or Off+Image,  
the image will only appear on the  
Transmission Verification Report if Real  
Time Transmission is set to Off. (See  
Some fax reports (transmission verification  
and fax journal) can be printed automatically  
and manually.  
Transmission verification  
report  
• If your transmission is successful, "OK"  
will appear next to "RESULT" on the  
Transmission Verification Report. If  
transmission is not successful, "NG" will  
appear next to "RESULT".  
11  
This report lists the sender's name or fax  
number, the time and date of transmission,  
duration of transmission, number of pages  
sent, and whether or not the transmission  
was successful.  
On: Prints a report after every fax you  
send.  
On+Image: Prints a report after every fax  
you send. A portion of the fax’s first page  
appears on the report.  
Off: Prints a report only if your fax is  
unsuccessful due to a transmission error.  
Off is the default setting.  
Off+Image: Prints a report only if your  
fax is unsuccessful due to a transmission  
error. A portion of the fax’s first page  
appears on the report.  
11  
a Press Menu, 2, 4, 1.  
24.Report Setting  
1.Transmission  
a
Off  
Off+Image  
b
Select ab or OK  
b Press a or b to choose On, On+Image,  
Off or Off+Image.  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
79  
     
Chapter 11  
Fax Journal  
11  
Reports  
11  
You can set the machine to print a fax journal  
(activity report) at specific intervals (every 50  
faxes, 6, 12 or 24 hours, 2 or 7 days). The  
default setting is Every 50 Faxes, this  
means that your machine will print the journal  
when the machine has stored 50 jobs.  
The following reports are available:  
1 Transmission  
Displays the Transmission Verification  
Report for your last outgoing 200 faxes  
and prints the last report.  
If you set the interval to Off, you can still print  
the report by following the steps on the next  
page.  
2 Help List  
Prints a list of commonly used functions to  
help you program your machine.  
a Press Menu, 2, 4, 2.  
3 Tel Index List  
24.Report Setting  
2.Journal Period  
Prints a list of names and numbers stored  
in the One Touch and Speed Dial memory  
in numerical or alphabetical order.  
a
Every 50 Faxes  
Every 6 Hours  
b
Select ab or OK  
4 Fax Journal  
Prints a list of information about your last  
200 incoming and outgoing faxes. (TX:  
transmit.) (RX: receive.)  
b Press a or b to choose an interval.  
Press OK.  
If you choose 7 days, you will be asked  
to choose a day when you want the 7  
day countdown to begin.  
5 User Settings  
Print a list of your current settings.  
6 Network Config  
c Enter the time to begin printing, in  
24 hour format.  
Lists your network settings.  
Press OK.  
For example: enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.  
How to print a report  
11  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
If you choose 6, 12, 24 hours, 2 or 7 days, the  
machine will print the report at the selected  
time and then erase all jobs from its memory.  
If the machine’s memory becomes full with  
200 jobs before the time you chose has  
passed, the machine will print the journal  
early and then erase all jobs from memory.  
a Press Menu, 6.  
6.Print Reports  
1.Transmission  
2.Help List  
3.Tel Index List  
Select ab or OK  
b Do one of the following:  
If you want an extra report before it is due to  
print, you can print it manually without erasing  
the jobs from memory.  
Press a or b to choose the report you  
want.  
Press OK.  
Enter the number of the report you  
want to print. For example, press 2 to  
print the Help List.  
c Press Start.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
80  
         
Section III  
Copy  
III  
 
Making copies  
12  
12  
Making a single copy  
12  
How to copy  
12  
a Make sure you are in Copy mode  
.
Entering copy mode  
12  
b Load your document.  
c Press Start.  
Press  
(Copy) to enter Copy mode.  
1 Contrast:-  
+
2
3
Quality :Auto  
Enlg/Red:100%  
Making multiple copies  
12  
4
Tray  
:MP>T1  
5
01  
Press ab or Start  
a Make sure you are in Copy mode  
b Load your document.  
.
Quality :Auto  
Enlg/Red:100%  
Tray  
Bright :-  
Select  
:MP>T1  
c Use the dial pad to enter the number of  
6
+
copies (up to 99).  
01  
& OK  
d Press Start.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Contrast  
Quality  
Note  
Copy ratio  
To sort your copies, see Sorting copies  
Tray selection  
Number of copies  
Brightness  
Stop copying  
12  
To stop copying, press Stop/Exit.  
82  
           
Making copies  
Custom(25-400%) allows you to enter a  
ratio from 25% to 400%.  
Copy options  
(temporary settings)  
12  
To enlarge or reduce the next copy follow the  
instructions below:  
When you want to quickly change the copy  
settings temporarily for the next copy, use the  
temporary Copy keys. You can use different  
combinations.  
a Make sure you are in Copy mode  
b Load your document.  
.
c Use the dial pad to enter the number of  
copies (up to 99).  
The machine returns to its default settings  
one minute after copying, unless you have  
set the Mode Timer to 30 seconds or less.  
d Press Enlarge/Reduce.  
Press c.  
e Do one of the following:  
Press a or b to choose the  
enlargement or reduction ratio you  
want.  
Enlarging or reducing the  
image copied  
12  
Press OK.  
You can choose the following enlargement or  
reduction ratios:  
Press a or b to choose  
Custom(25-400%).  
Press OK.  
Press  
100%*  
Use the dial pad to enter an  
enlargement or reduction ratio from  
25% to 400%. (For example, press 5  
3 to enter 53%.)  
97% LTRiA4  
94% A4iLTR  
91% Full Page  
Press OK.  
85% LTRiEXE  
83%LGLiA4  
78%LGLiLTR  
f Press Start.  
Note  
12  
70% A4iA5  
50%  
Page Layout Options 2 in 1(P), 2 in 1(L), 4  
in 1(P) or 4 in 1(L) are not available with  
Enlarge/Reduce.  
Custom(25-400%)  
Auto  
200%  
141% A5iA4  
104% EXEiLTR  
* The factory setting is shown in Bold with an  
asterisk.  
Auto sets the machine to calculate the  
reduction ratio that best fits the size of paper.  
Auto is only available when using the ADF.  
83  
   
Chapter 12  
Improving copy quality  
12  
Sorting copies using the ADF  
12  
You can choose from a range of quality  
settings. The default setting is Auto.  
You can sort multiple copies. Pages will be  
stacked in the order 1 2 3, 1 2 3, 1 2 3, and so  
on.  
Auto  
Auto is the recommended mode for  
ordinary printouts. Suitable for documents  
that contain both text and photographs.  
a Make sure you are in Copy mode  
b Load your document in the ADF.  
.
Text  
c Use the dial pad to enter the number of  
Suitable for documents containing only  
text.  
copies (up to 99).  
d Press Sort.  
e Press Start.  
Photo  
Suitable for copying photographs.  
To temporarily change the quality setting,  
follow the steps below:  
Changing text copy  
resolution  
12  
a Make sure you are in Copy mode  
b Load your document.  
.
You can change the text copy resolution to  
1200x600 dpi if you are using the scanner  
glass and have selected Text as the  
Contrast/Quality and an enlargement or  
reduction ratio of 100%. The default setting is  
600 dpi.  
c Use the dial pad to enter the number of  
copies (up to 99).  
d Press Contrast/Quality. Press a or b to  
choose Quality.  
a Make sure you are in Copy mode  
.
Press OK.  
e Press d or c to choose Auto, Text or  
b Place your document on the scanner  
Photo.  
glass.  
Press OK.  
c Press Menu, 3, 2.  
f Press Start.  
32.FB Txt Quality  
To change the default setting, follow the  
steps below:  
a
b
1200x600 dpi  
600dpi  
Select ab or OK  
a Press Menu, 3, 1.  
d Press a or b to choose the text copy  
31.Quality  
a
Text  
Photo  
Auto  
resolution.  
Press OK.  
b
Select ab or OK  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
b Press a or b to choose the copy quality.  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
84  
       
Making copies  
Brightness  
12  
Adjusting Contrast and  
Brightness  
Adjust the copy brightness to make copies  
darker or lighter.  
12  
To temporarily change the copy brightness  
setting, follow the steps below:  
Contrast  
12  
Adjust the contrast to help an image look  
sharper and more vivid.  
a Make sure you are in Copy mode  
b Load your document.  
.
To temporarily change the contrast setting,  
follow the steps below:  
c Use the dial pad to enter the number of  
a Make sure you are in Copy mode  
b Load your document.  
.
copies (up to 99).  
d Press a or b to choose Bright.  
Quality :Auto  
Enlg/Red:100%  
c Use the dial pad to enter the number of  
copies (up to 99).  
Tray  
:MP>T1  
Bright :-nnonn+c  
d Press Contrast/Quality.  
Press a or b to choose Contrast.  
Press OK.  
Select d c & OK  
01  
e Press c to make a lighter copy or press  
d to make a darker copy.  
Press OK.  
Contrast:-nnonn+c  
Quality :Auto  
Enlg/Red:100%  
Tray  
Select d c & OK  
:MP>T1  
f Press Start.  
To change the default setting follow the steps  
01  
below:  
e Press d or c to increase or decrease the  
contrast.  
Press OK.  
a Press Menu, 3, 3.  
33.Brightness  
f Press Start.  
To change the default setting follow the steps  
-nnonn+  
below:  
Select d c & OK  
12  
a Press Menu, 3, 4.  
b Press c to make a lighter copy or press  
d to make a darker copy.  
Press OK.  
34.Contrast  
-nnonn+  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
Select d c & OK  
b Press d or c to increase or decrease the  
contrast.  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
85  
   
Chapter 12  
h Place the next page on the scanner  
Making N in 1 copies  
(page layout)  
glass.  
12  
Press OK.  
Repeat steps g and h for each page of  
the layout.  
You can reduce the amount of paper used  
when copying by using the N in 1 copy  
feature. This allows you to copy two or four  
pages onto one page, which lets you save  
paper.  
i After all the pages have been scanned,  
press 2 in step g to finish.  
If you are copying from the ADF:  
12  
IMPORTANT  
Insert your document face up in the direction  
shown below:  
• Please make sure the paper size is set to  
Letter, A4, Legalor Folio.  
2 in 1 (P)  
• (P) means Portrait and (L) means  
Landscape.  
• You cannot use the Enlarge/Reduce  
setting with the N in 1 feature.  
2 in 1 (L)  
a Make sure you are in Copy mode  
b Load your document.  
.
4 in 1 (P)  
4 in 1 (L)  
c Use the dial pad to enter the number of  
copies (up to 99).  
d Press N in 1.  
e Press a or b to choose 2 in 1 (P),  
2 in 1 (L), 4 in 1 (P),  
4 in 1 (L)or Off(1 in 1).  
Press OK.  
f Press Start to scan the page.  
If you placed the document in the ADF,  
the machine scans the pages and starts  
printing.  
If you are using the scanner glass, go  
to step g.  
g After the machine scans the page, press  
1 to scan the next page.  
Flatbed Copy:  
Next Page?  
a
1.Yes  
2.No  
b
Select ab or OK  
86  
         
Making copies  
If you are copying from the scanner  
glass:  
Duplex (2-sided)  
copying  
12  
12  
Insert your document face down in the  
direction shown below:  
If you want to use the duplex copy feature,  
load your document in the ADF.  
2 in 1 (P)  
If you get an Out of Memory message while  
you are making duplex copies, try installing  
extra memory. (See Out of memory message  
2 in 1 (L)  
Duplex Copy  
(long edge flip)  
12  
4 in 1 (P)  
4 in 1 (L)  
MFC-8480DN  
1 sided i2 sided L  
Portrait  
1
1
2
Landscape  
1
1
2
a Make sure you are in Copy mode  
b Load your document.  
.
12  
c Enter the number of copies (up to 99)  
using the dial pad.  
d Press Duplex and a or b to select  
1sidedi2sided L.  
Duplex  
a1sidedi2sided L  
1sidedi2sided S  
bOff  
Select ab or OK  
Press OK.  
e Press Start to copy the document.  
87  
     
Chapter 12  
MFC-8890DW  
1 sided i2 sided  
Portrait  
a Make sure you are in Copy mode  
b Load your document.  
.
c Enter the number of copies (up to 99)  
1
using the dial pad.  
1
2
d Press Duplex and a or b to select  
1sided i 2sided,  
2sided i 2sidedor  
Landscape  
2sided i 1sided.  
Duplex  
1
a1sided i 2sided  
2sided i 2sided  
b2sided i 1sided  
Select ab or OK  
1
2
2 sided i2 sided  
Press OK.  
Portrait  
e Press Start to copy the document.  
1
1
Note  
Duplex copy using a 2-sided legal size  
document is not available.  
Landscape  
Advanced Duplex Copy  
(short edge flip)  
1
1
12  
MFC-8480DN  
1 sided i2 sided S  
Portrait  
2 sided i1 sided  
Portrait  
1
1
1
2
1
2
Landscape  
Landscape  
1
1
1
2
1
2
a Make sure you are in Copy mode  
b Load your document.  
.
88  
 
Making copies  
c Enter the number of copies (up to 99)  
c Enter the number of copies (up to 99)  
using the dial pad.  
using the dial pad.  
d Press Duplex and a or b to select  
1sidedi2sided S.  
d Press Duplex and a or b to select  
Advanced.  
Duplex  
Duplex  
a1sidedi2sided L  
1sidedi2sided S  
bOff  
a1sided i 2sided  
2sided i 2sided  
b2sided i 1sided  
Select ab or OK  
Select ab or OK  
Press OK.  
Press OK.  
e Press Start to copy the document.  
MFC-8890DW  
e Press a or b to select  
2sided i 1sidedor  
1sided i 2sided.  
Press OK.  
Advanced 2 sided i1 sided  
Portrait  
Duplex Advanced  
a2sided i 1sided  
b1sided i 2sided  
1
Select ab or OK  
1
f Press Start to copy the document.  
2
Landscape  
Note  
Duplex copy using a 2-sided legal size  
document is not available.  
1
1
2
Advanced 1 sided i2 sided  
Portrait  
1
12  
1
2
Landscape  
1
1
2
a Make sure you are in Copy mode  
b Load your document.  
.
89  
Chapter 12  
Tray selection  
12  
Out of memory  
message  
12  
You can change the Tray Use only for the  
next copy.  
If the memory becomes full while you are  
making copies, the LCD message will guide  
you through the next step.  
a Make sure you are in Copy mode  
b Load your document.  
.
If you get an Out of Memorymessage  
while scanning a subsequent page, you will  
have the option to press Start to copy the  
pages scanned so far, or to press Stop/Exit  
to cancel the operation.  
c Use the dial pad to enter the number of  
copies (up to 99).  
d Press Tray Select.  
To gain extra memory, you can do the  
following:  
e Press d or c to choose the MP>T1,  
T1>MP, #1(XXX) or MP(XXX) .  
Press OK.  
Print the faxes that are in the memory.  
f Press Start.  
You can turn off Fax Storage. (See  
Press  
MP>T1or M>T1>T2  
T1>MPor T1>T2>M  
Note  
#1(XXX)  
When you get an Out of Memory  
message, you may be able to make  
copies if you first print incoming faxes in  
the memory to restore the memory to  
100%.  
#2(XXX)  
MP(XXX)  
1
XXX is the paper size you set in Menu, 1, 2, 2.  
Note  
• T2 or #2 appears only if the optional paper  
tray is installed.  
• To change the default setting for Tray  
90  
       
Printing data from a USB Flash  
memory drive or a digital camera  
supporting mass storage  
13  
13  
With the Direct Print feature, you do not need  
a computer to print data. You can print by just  
plugging your USB Flash memory drive into  
the machine’s USB direct interface. You can  
also connect and print directly from a camera  
set to USB mass storage mode.  
Creating a PRN or  
PostScript 3™ file for  
direct printing  
®
13  
Note  
Note  
The screens in this section may vary  
depending on your application and  
operating system.  
• Some USB Flash memory drives may not  
work with the machine.  
• If your camera is in PictBridge mode, you  
cannot print data. Please refer to the  
documentation supplied with your camera  
to switch from PictBridge mode to mass  
storage mode.  
a From the menu bar of an application,  
click File, then Print.  
b Choose Brother MFCXXXX Printer (1)  
and check the Print to file box (2).  
Click Print.  
Supported file formats  
13  
1
Direct Print supports the following file  
formats:  
2
PDF version 1.7  
JPEG  
Exif + JPEG  
PRN (created by Brother driver)  
TIFF (scanned by all MFC or DCP Brother  
models)  
®
PostScript 3™ (created by the Brother  
BRScript3 printer driver)  
c Choose the folder you want to save the  
file to and enter the file name if you are  
prompted to.  
XPS version 1.0  
1
PDF data that includes a JBIG2 image file a  
JPEG2000 image file or transparency files is not  
supported.  
If you are prompted for a file name only,  
you can also specify the folder you want  
to save the file in by entering the  
directory name. For example:  
C:\Temp\FileName.prn  
If you have a USB Flash memory drive  
or digital camera connected to your  
computer, you can save the file directly  
to the USB Flash memory drive.  
92  
       
Printing data from a USB Flash memory drive or a digital camera supporting mass storage  
• If the current restricted user ID you are  
Printing data directly  
using is restricted for the Direct Print  
function from Secure Function Lock 2.0,  
but other restricted users (including Public  
mode settings) are allowed access,  
Access Denied” will appear on the  
LCD and then the machine will ask your  
name.  
from the USB Flash  
memory drive or digital  
camera supporting  
mass storage  
13  
If you are a restricted user with access to  
Direct Print, press a or b to choose your  
name and enter your four-digit password.  
a Connect your USB Flash memory drive  
or digital camera to the USB direct  
interface (1) on the front of the machine.  
Your machine will enter Direct Print  
mode automatically.  
• If your administrator has set a page limit  
for Direct Print and the machine has  
already reached the maximum number of  
pages, the LCD will show  
Limit Exceeded” when you insert a  
USB flash memory drive or digital camera.  
b Press a or b to choose the folder name  
or file name you want to print.  
Press OK.  
1
If you have chosen the folder name,  
press a or b to choose the file name you  
want to print.  
Press OK.  
Direct Print  
a1.FILE0_1.PDF  
2.FILE0_2.PDF  
b3.FILE0_3.PDF  
Select ab or OK  
1
Note  
• Your digital camera must be switched  
from PictBridge mode to mass storage  
mode.  
13  
• If you want to print an index of the files,  
choose Index Print, and then press  
OK. Press Start to print the data.  
Note  
• File names that are stored in your USB  
Flash memory drive can be displayed  
using the following characters on the LCD:  
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T  
U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 $ % ’ ` - @  
{ } ~ ! # ( ) & _ ^  
• If the Direct Print setting of Secure  
Function Lock 2.0 is set to “Disable” for  
all users (including Public mode settings),  
Not Available” will appear on the  
LCD and then the machine will go back to  
the Ready mode. You cannot access the  
Direct Print function.  
93  
 
Chapter 13  
c Do one of the following:  
IMPORTANT  
Press a or b to choose a setting you  
need to change and press OK, and  
then press a or b to choose an option  
for the setting and press OK.  
• To prevent damage to your machine, DO  
NOT connect any device other than a  
digital camera or USB Flash memory drive  
to the USB direct interface.  
If you do not need to change the  
current default settings, go to  
step d.  
• DO NOT remove the USB Flash memory  
drive or digital camera from the USB direct  
interface until the machine has finished  
printing.  
Print File Set  
aPaper Size  
Media Type  
bMultiple Page  
Select ab or OK  
Note  
• If you want to change the default setting  
for the paper tray to feed paper from,  
press Menu, 1, 6, 3 to change the paper  
tray setting.  
Note  
• You can choose the following settings:  
Paper Size  
Media Type  
Multiple Page  
Orientation  
Duplex  
• You can change the default settings for  
Direct Print by using the control panel  
when the machine is not in the Direct Print  
mode. Press Menu, 5 to enter the  
USB Direct I/Fmenu. (See Entering  
Collate  
Tray Use  
Understanding the  
error messages  
Print Quality  
PDF Option  
13  
• Depending on the file type, some of  
these settings may not appear.  
Once you are familiar with the types of errors  
that can occur while you print data from the  
USB Flash memory drive with Direct Print,  
you can easily identify and troubleshoot any  
problems.  
d Press Start if you have finished.  
e Press the dial pad key to enter the  
number of copies you want.  
Press OK.  
Out of Memory  
This message will appear if you are  
working with images that are too large for  
the machine’s memory.  
Direct Print  
FILE0_1.PDF  
Unusable Device  
No. of Copies:  
This message will appear if you connect  
an incompatible or broken device to the  
USB direct interface. To clear the error,  
unplug the device from the USB direct  
interface.  
Press Start  
1
f Press Start to print the data.  
on page 134 for the detailed solution.)  
94  
       
Section V  
Software  
V
 
Software and Network features  
14  
14  
The User’s Guide on the CD-ROM includes  
the Software User’s Guide and  
Network User’s Guide.  
How to read the HTML  
User’s Guide  
14  
The User’s Guide on the CD-ROM includes  
the Software User’s Guide and  
This is a quick reference for using the HTML  
User’s Guide.  
Network User’s Guide for features available  
when connected to a computer (for example,  
printing and scanning). These guides have  
easy to use links that, when clicked, will take  
you directly to a particular section.  
Windows®  
14  
Note  
You can find information on these features:  
If you have not installed the software, see  
Printing  
Scanning  
®
ControlCenter3 (Windows )  
a From the Start menu, point to Brother,  
MFC-XXXX from the programs group,  
then click  
®
ControlCenter2 (Macintosh )  
Remote Setup  
User’s Guides in HTML format.  
Faxing from your computer  
LDAP (MFC-8890DW only)  
Network Faxing  
b Click on the manual you want  
(SOFTWARE USER’S GUIDE or  
NETWORK USER’S GUIDE) from the  
top menu.  
Network Printing  
Network Scanning  
Scan to E-mail Server (I-Fax)  
(MFC-8890DW only)  
Wireless Network Users  
(MFC-8890DW only)  
Note  
c Click the heading you would like to view  
from the list at the left of the window.  
96  
     
Software and Network features  
Macintosh®  
14  
®
a Make sure your Macintosh is turned  
on. Insert the Brother CD-ROM into your  
CD-ROM drive.  
b Double-click the Documentation icon.  
c Double-click your language folder, and  
then double-click the top.html file.  
d Click on the manual you want  
(SOFTWARE USER’S GUIDE or  
NETWORK USER’S GUIDE) in the top  
menu, and then click the heading you  
would like to read from the list at the left  
of the window.  
14  
97  
 
Chapter 14  
98  
Safety and legal  
A
A
Choosing a location  
A
Put your machine on a flat, stable surface that is free of vibration and shocks, such as a desk. Put  
the machine near a telephone wall jack and a standard grounded AC power outlet. Choose a  
location where the temperature remains between 50°F and 90.5°F (10°C and 32.5°C) and the  
humidity is between 20% to 80% (without condensation.)  
WARNING  
DO NOT expose the machine to direct sunlight, excessive heat, open flames, salty or corrosive  
gasses, moisture or dust.  
DO NOT place the machine near heaters, air conditioners, refrigerators, water, chemicals or  
devices that contain magnets or generate magnetic fields.  
CAUTION  
Avoid placing your machine in a high-traffic area.  
DO NOT connect your machine to an AC power outlet controlled by wall switches or automatic  
timers.  
DO NOT connect your machine to an AC power outlet on the same circuit as large appliances  
or other equipment that might disrupt the power supply.  
Disruption of power can wipe out information in the machine’s memory.  
Avoid interference sources, such as speakers or the base units of non-Brother cordless  
telephones.  
DO NOT put objects on top of the machine.  
100  
   
Safety and legal  
To use the machine safely  
A
Please keep these instructions for later reference and read them before attempting any  
maintenance. If you do not follow these safety instructions, there is a possibility of a fire, electrical  
shock, burn or suffocation.  
WARNING  
There are high voltage electrodes inside the machine. Before you clean the inside of the  
machine, make sure you have unplugged the telephone line cord first and then the power cord  
from the AC power outlet. Doing this will prevent an electrical shock.  
DO NOT handle the plug with wet hands. Doing this might cause an electrical shock.  
Always make sure the plug is fully inserted.  
To reduce the risk of shock or fire, use only a No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord.  
This product must be installed near an AC power outlet that is easily accessible. In case of an  
emergency, you must unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet to shut off the power  
completely.  
Lighting and power surges can damage this product! We recommend that you use a quality  
surge protection device on the AC power line and on the telephone line, or unplug the cords  
during a lightning storm.  
A
Plastic bags are used in the packing of your machine and drum unit. To avoid the danger of  
suffocation, keep these bags away from babies and children.  
101  
 
DO NOT use flammable substances, any type of spray, or an organic solvent/liquid that contains  
alcohol or ammonia to clean the inside or outside of the machine. See Routine maintenance  
on page 148 for how to clean the machine.  
DO NOT use a vacuum cleaner to clean up scattered toner. Doing this might cause the toner  
dust to ignite inside the vacuum cleaner, potentially starting a fire. Please carefully clean the  
toner dust with a dry, lint-free cloth and dispose of it according to local regulations.  
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. Never touch telephone wires or  
terminals that are not insulated unless the telephone line has been unplugged at the wall jack.  
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. Never install a telephone wall jack in a  
wet location.  
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to  
reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock and injury to people, including the following:  
1 DO NOT use this product near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink  
or washing machine, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.  
2 Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric  
shock from lightning.  
3 DO NOT use this product to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.  
4 DO NOT dispose of batteries in a fire. They may explode. Check with local codes for possible  
special disposal instructions.  
5 Use only the power cord provided with the machine.  
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS  
102  
Safety and legal  
CAUTION  
After you have just used the machine, some internal parts of the machine will be extremely hot.  
To prevent injury, when you open the front or back cover (back output tray) of the machine, DO  
NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustration.  
To prevent injuries, be careful not to put your hands on the edge of the machine under the  
document cover as shown in the illustration.  
To prevent injuries, be careful not to put your fingers in the areas shown in the illustrations.  
A
103  
When you move the machine, grasp the side hand holds that are under the scanner.  
IMPORTANT  
The fuser unit is marked with a Caution label. Please DO NOT remove or damage the label.  
104  
Safety and legal  
Important safety instructions  
A
1 Read all of these instructions.  
2 Save them for later reference.  
3 Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.  
4 Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning inside of the machine. DO NOT use  
liquid or aerosol cleaners. Use a dry, lint-free cloth for cleaning.  
5 DO NOT place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The product may fall, causing  
serious damage to the product.  
6 Slots and openings in the cabinet at the back or bottom are provided for ventilation. To ensure  
reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, these openings must not  
be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,  
sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should never be placed near or over a radiator  
or heater. This product should never be placed in a built-in installation unless adequate  
ventilation is provided.  
7 This product should be connected to an AC power source within the range indicated on the  
rating label. DO NOT connect it to a DC power source or inverter. If you are not sure, contact  
a qualified electrician.  
8 This product is equipped with a 3-wire grounded plug. This plug will only fit into a grounded  
power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, call  
your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. DO NOT defeat the purpose of the grounded  
plug.  
9 Use only the power cord supplied with this machine.  
10 DO NOT allow anything to rest on the power cord. DO NOT place this product where people  
can walk on the cord.  
11 If an extension cord is used with this product, make sure that the total ampere ratings on the  
products plugged into the extension cord DO NOT exceed the extension cord ampere rating.  
Also, make sure that the total of all products plugged into the AC power outlet does not exceed  
15 amperes (US only).  
12 The power cord, including extensions, should be no longer than 16.5 feet (5 meters).  
DO NOT share the same power circuit with other high powered appliances, such as an air  
conditioner, copier, shredder, and so on. If you cannot avoid using the printer with these  
appliances, we recommend that you use a voltage transformer or a high-frequency noise filter.  
Use a voltage regulator if the power source is not stable.  
13 DO NOT place anything in front of the machine that will block received faxes. DO NOT place  
anything in the path of received faxes.  
A
14 Wait until pages have exited the machine before picking them up.  
105  
 
15 Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots, since they may touch  
dangerous voltage points or short out parts resulting in the risk of fire or electric shock. Never  
spill liquid of any kind on the product. DO NOT attempt to service this product yourself because  
opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage points and other risks and  
may void your warranty. Refer all servicing to a Brother Authorized Service Center. For the  
location of your nearest Brother Authorized Service Center, please call:  
In USA: 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437)  
In Canada: 1-877-BROTHER  
16 Unplug this product from the AC power outlet and refer all servicing to Brother Authorized  
Service Personnel under the following conditions:  
When the power cord is damaged or frayed.  
If liquid has been spilled into the product.  
If the product has been exposed to rain or water.  
If the product does not operate normally when the operating instructions are followed.  
Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions. Improper  
adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by  
a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.  
If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.  
If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service.  
17 To protect your product against power surges, we recommend the use of a power protection  
device (Surge Protector).  
18 To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to people, note the following:  
DO NOT use this product near appliances that use water, a swimming pool or in a wet  
basement.  
DO NOT use the machine during an electrical storm (there is the remote possibility of an  
electrical shock). If you have connected a telephone DO NOT use it to report a gas leak in  
the vicinity of the leak.  
DO NOT use this product in the vicinity of a gas leak.  
106  
Safety and legal  
Standard telephone and FCC notices  
A
These notices are in effect on models sold and used in the United States only.  
When programming emergency numbers or making test calls to emergency numbers:  
Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging  
up.  
Perform these activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning or late evening.  
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the  
ACTA. On the backside of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a  
product identifier in the format US: AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided  
to the telephone company.  
You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone line by means of a standard modular jack,  
USOC RJ11C.  
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network  
must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A  
compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be  
connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. (See installation instructions for  
details.)  
The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line.  
Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an  
incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be  
certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs,  
contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this  
product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.The digits  
represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 06 is a REN of 0.6). For earlier  
products, the REN is separately shown on the label.  
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in  
advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is not  
practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be  
advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.  
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures  
that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will  
provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted  
service.  
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, please contact  
Brother Customer Service. (See Brother numbers on page i.) If the equipment is causing harm to  
the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment  
until the problem is resolved.  
A
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility  
commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information.  
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the  
installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about  
what will disable alarm equipment, call your telephone company or a qualified installer.  
107  
 
If you are not able to solve a problem with your machine, call Brother Customer Service. (See  
WARNING  
For protection against the risk of electrical shock, always disconnect all cables from the wall  
outlet before servicing, modifying or installing the equipment.  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Declaration of Conformity (USA only)  
Responsible Party:  
Brother International Corporation  
100 Somerset Corporate Boulevard  
Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911 USA  
TEL: (908) 704-1700  
declares, that the products  
Product Name: MFC-8480DN and MFC-8890DW  
comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This  
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference  
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,  
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection  
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can  
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,  
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that  
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful  
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment  
off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following  
measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is  
connected.  
Call the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or  
transmitter.  
108  
Safety and legal  
IMPORTANT  
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Brother Industries, Ltd. could void the  
user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
• A shielded interface cable should be used to ensure compliance with the limits for a Class B  
digital device.  
• This equipment may not be used on coin service lines provided by the telephone company or  
connected to party lines.  
• Brother cannot accept any financial or other responsibilities that may be the result of your use  
of this information, including direct, special or consequential damages. There are no  
warranties extended or granted by this document.  
• This machine has been certified to comply with FCC standards, which are applied to the USA  
only. A grounded plug should be plugged into a grounded AC power outlet after checking the  
rating of the local power supply for the machine to operate properly and safely.  
Industry Canada Compliance Statement (Canada only)  
A
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES–003.  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB–003 du Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference,  
and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of this device.  
Laser safety  
A
This equipment is certified as a Class 1 laser product as defined in IEC 60825-1+A2: 2001  
specifications under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation  
Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This  
means that the equipment does not produce hazardous laser radiation.  
Since radiation emitted inside the equipment is completely confined within protective housings  
and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user  
operation.  
A
109  
   
FDA regulations  
A
U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has implemented regulations for laser products  
manufactured on and after August 2, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the  
United States. One of the following labels on the back of the machine indicates compliance with  
the FDA regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.  
Manufactured:  
BROTHER Industries (Vietnam) LTD.  
Phuc Dien Industrial Zone Cam Phuc Commune, Cam giang Dist Hai Duong Province, Vietnam.  
This product complies with FDA performance standards for laser products except for deviations pursuant  
to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007.  
Manufactured:  
BROTHER TECHNOLOGY (SHENZHEN) LTD.  
NO6 Gold Garden Ind., Nanling Buji, Longgang, Shenzhen, China  
This product complies with FDA performance standards for laser products except for deviations pursuant  
to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007.  
WARNING  
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this  
manual may result in hazardous invisible radiation exposure.  
Internal laser radiation  
Max. Radiation Power: 5 mW  
Wave Length: 770 – 810 nm  
Laser Class: Class 3B  
Disconnect device  
A
This product must be installed near an AC power outlet that is easily accessible. In case of  
emergencies, you must disconnect the power cord from the AC power outlet to shut off power  
completely.  
110  
   
Safety and legal  
LAN connection  
CAUTION  
A
DO NOT connect this product to a LAN connection that is subject to over-voltages.  
International ENERGY STAR® Compliance Statement  
A
®
The purpose of the International ENERGY STAR Program is to promote the development and  
popularization of energy-efficient office equipment.  
®
As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Brother Industries, Ltd. has determined that this product meets  
®
the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency.  
A
111  
   
Libtiff Copyright and License  
A
Use and Copyright  
Copyright© 1988-1997 Sam Leffler  
Copyright© 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.  
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any  
purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this  
permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the  
names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating  
to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics.  
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,  
EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY  
OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  
IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,  
INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR ANY  
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,  
WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE, AND ON ANY THEORY  
OF LIABILITY, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE  
OF THIS SOFTWARE.  
112  
 
Safety and legal  
Trademarks  
A
The Brother logo is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.  
Brother is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.  
Multi-Function Link is a registered trademark of Brother International Corporation.  
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
Windows Vista is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and other countries.  
Apple, Macintosh, Safari and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the United  
States and other countries.  
Intel, and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.  
AMD is a trademark of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.  
PowerPC is a registered trademark of IBM in the United States and/or other countries.  
Adobe, Flash, Illustrator, PageMaker, Photoshop, PostScript and PostScript 3 are either  
registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or  
other countries.  
Epson is a registered trademark and FX-80 and FX-850 are trademarks of Seiko Epson  
Corporation.  
IBM and Proprinter are either registered trademarks or trademarks of International Business  
Machines Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
BROADCOM, SecureEasySetup and the SecureEasySetup logo are trademarks or registered  
trademarks of Broadcom Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
Wi-Fi, WPA, WPA2, Wi-Fi Protected Access and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are either trademarks or  
registered trademarkes of Wi-Fi Alliance in the United States and/or other countries.  
AOSS is a trademark of Buffalo Inc.  
Nuance, the Nuance logo, PaperPort and ScanSoft are trademarks or registered trademarks of  
Nuance Communications, Inc. or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.  
OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation.  
Each company whose sotfware title is mentioned in this manual has a Software License  
Agreement specific to its proprietary programs.  
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
A
113  
 
Options  
B
B
Options  
B
This machine has the following optional accessories. You can increase the capabilities of the  
machine with these items.  
Lower tray unit  
SO-DIMM memory  
LT-5300  
114  
   
Options  
Optional paper tray  
(LT-5300)  
Memory board  
B
B
This machine has 64 MB of standard memory  
and one slot for optional memory expansion.  
You can expand the memory up to 576 MB by  
installing dual in-line memory modules (SO-  
DIMMs). When you add the optional memory,  
it increases the performance for both copier  
and printer operations.  
B
An optional lower tray can be installed, and it  
2
can hold up to 250 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m )  
paper.  
When an optional tray is installed, the  
machine can hold up to 550 sheets of plain  
paper.  
In general, the machine uses  
industry-standard SO-DIMM with the  
following specifications:  
Type: 144 pin and 64 bit output  
CAS latency: 2  
Clock frequency: 100 MHz or more  
Capacity: 64, 128, 256 or 512 MB  
Height: 1.25 in. (31.75 mm)  
Dram Type: SDRAM 2 Bank  
For setup, see the Instructions that we have  
supplied with the lower tray unit.  
The following web sites sell memory  
modules:  
Note  
• There might be some SO-DIMMs that will  
not work with the machine.  
• For more information, call Brother  
Customer Service.  
115  
   
e Hold the SO-DIMM by the edges and  
align the notches in the SO-DIMM with  
the protrusions in the slot. Insert the  
SO-DIMM diagonally (1), then tilt it  
toward the interface board until it clicks  
into place (2).  
Installing extra memory  
B
a Turn off the machine’s power switch.  
Unplug the telephone line cord.  
b Disconnect the interface cable from the  
machine, and then unplug the power  
cord from the AC power outlet.  
Note  
1
2
Be sure to turn off the machine’s power  
switch before you install or remove the  
SO-DIMM.  
c Remove the SO-DIMM cover and  
f Put the interface access cover and the  
interface access cover.  
SO-DIMM cover back on.  
g Plug the machine’s power cord back into  
the AC power outlet first, and then  
connect the interface cable.  
h Plug in the telephone line cord. Turn on  
the machine’s power switch.  
Note  
To make sure that you have installed the  
SO-DIMM properly, you can print the user  
settings page that shows the current  
memory size. (See How to print a report  
d Unpack the SO-DIMM and hold it by its  
edges.  
IMPORTANT  
To prevent damage to the machine from  
static electricity, DO NOT touch the  
memory chips or the board surface.  
116  
 
Troubleshooting and routine  
maintenance  
C
C
Troubleshooting  
C
C
IMPORTANT  
For technical help, you must call the country where you bought the machine. Calls must be  
made from within that country.  
If you are having difficulty with your machine  
C
If you think there is a problem, check the chart below and follow the troubleshooting tips. You can  
solve most problems by yourself.  
If you need additional help, the Brother Solutions Center offers the latest FAQs and  
troubleshooting tips.  
Printing or printing received faxes  
C
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
Condensed print  
Horizontal streaks  
Usually this is caused by a poor telephone connection. If your copy looks good,  
you probably had a bad connection, with static or interference on the telephone  
line. Ask the other party to send the fax again.  
Top and bottom sentences are  
cut off  
Missing lines  
Poor print quality  
Vertical black lines when receiving The corona wire for printing may be dirty. Clean the corona wire. (See Cleaning  
The sender’s scanner may be dirty. Ask the sender to make a copy to see if the  
problem is with the sending machine. Try receiving from another fax machine.  
If the problem continues, call Brother Customer Service at 1-877-BROTHER  
(1-877-276-8437) (in USA) or 1-877-BROTHER (in Canada).  
Received faxes appear as split or  
blank pages.  
If the received faxes are divided and printed on two pages or if you get an extra  
blank page, your paper size setting may not be correct for the paper you are using.  
Turn on Auto Reduction. (See Printing a reduced incoming fax on page 52.)  
117  
       
Telephone line or connections  
C
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
Dialing does not work.  
Check for a dial tone.  
Change Tone/Pulsesetting. (See the Quick Setup Guide.) (Canada only)  
Check all line cord connections.  
Check that the machine is plugged in and switched on.  
Send a manual fax by pressing Hook or by lifting the handset of an external  
telephone and dialing the number. Wait to hear fax receiving tones before  
pressing Start.  
The machine does not answer  
when called.  
Make sure the machine is in the correct receive mode for your setup. (See  
on page 48.) Check for a dial tone. If possible, call your machine to hear it answer.  
If there is still no answer, check the telephone line cord connection. If you do not  
hear ringing when you call your machine, ask your telephone company to check  
the line.  
Receiving Fax  
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
Cannot receive a fax.  
Make sure your machine has a dial tone by pressing the Hook key. If you hear  
static or interference on your fax line, please contact your local telephone  
company.  
Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into  
the telephone wall jack and the LINE jack of the machine. If you subscribe to DSL  
or VoIP services, please contact your service provider for connection instructions.  
Make sure the machine is in the correct Receive Mode. This is determined by the  
external devices and telephone subscriber services you have on the same line as  
the Brother machine. (See Receive Mode settings on page 50.)  
If you have a dedicated fax line and want your Brother machine to automatically  
answer all incoming faxes, you should select Fax Onlymode.  
If your Brother machine shares a line with an external answering machine, you  
should select the External TADmode. In External TADmode, your Brother  
machine will automatically receive incoming faxes and voice callers will be able to  
leave a message on your answering machine.  
If your Brother machine shares the line with a Voice Mail subsciber service, please  
If your Brother machine is on a line with the Distinctive Ring subscriber service,  
If your Brother machine shares a line with other telephones and you want it to  
automatically answer all incoming faxes, you should select the Fax/Telmode. In  
Fax/Telmode, your Brother machine will automatically receive faxes and  
produce a pseudo/double-ring to alert you to answer voice calls.  
If you do not want your Brother machine to automatically answer any incoming  
faxes, you should select the Manualmode. In Manualmode, you must answer  
every incoming call and activate the machine to receive faxes.  
118  
 
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
Receiving Fax (continued)  
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
Cannot receive a fax.  
(continued)  
Another device or service at your location may be answering the call before your  
Brother machine answers. To test this, lower the ring delay setting:  
If the answer mode is set to Fax Onlyor Fax/Tel, reduce the ring delay to  
C
If the answer mode is set to External TAD, reduce the number of rings  
programmed on your answering machine to 2.  
If the answer mode is set to Manual, do not adjust the ring delay setting.  
Have someone send you a test fax:  
If you received the test fax successfully, your machine is operating properly.  
Remember to reset your ring delay or answering machine setting back to your  
original setting. If receiving problems recur after resetting the ring delay, then  
a person, device, or subscriber service is answering the fax call before the  
machine has a chance to answer.  
If you were not able to receive the fax, then another device or subscriber  
service may be interfering with your fax reception or there may be a problem  
with your fax line.  
If you are using a telephone answering machine (External TADmode) on the  
same line as the Brother machine, make sure your answering machine is set up  
1
Plug the telephone line cord directly from the wall telephone jack to your  
Brother machine’s LINE jack.  
2
3
2. Remove the protective cap from your Brother machine’s EXT jack, and then  
plug the telephone line cord from your answering machine into the EXT jack.  
Set your answering machine to answer within 4 rings.  
If you are having problems receiving faxes or voice messages, set your  
answering machine to answer within 2 or 3 rings.  
4
Record the outgoing message on your answering machine.  
Record five seconds of silence at the beginning of your outgoing  
message.  
Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.  
End your outgoing message with your Fax Receive Code for people  
sending manual faxes. For example: “After the beep, leave a message or  
press l51 and Start to send a fax.”  
5
6
Set your answering machine to answer calls.  
Set your Brother machine’s Receive Mode to External TAD. (See Receive  
Make sure your Brother machine's Easy Receive feature is turned On. Easy  
Receive is a feature that allows you to receive a fax even if you have answered  
the call on an external or extension telephone. (See Easy Receive on page 51.)  
If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone  
line, try changing the Compatibility setting to Basic(for VoIP). (See  
119  
Sending faxes  
C
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
Poor sending quality.  
Try changing your resolution to Fineor S.Fine. Make a copy to check your  
machine’s scanner operation. If the copy quality is not good, clean the scanner.  
Transmission Verification Report  
says ‘RESULT:NG’.  
There is probably temporary noise or static on the line. Try sending the fax again.  
If you are sending a PC Fax message and get ‘RESULT:NG’ on the Transmission  
Verification Report, your machine may be out of memory. To free up extra  
memory, you can turn off fax storage (see Turning off Remote Fax Options  
on page 73), print fax messages in memory (see Printing a fax from the memory  
on page 53) or cancel a delayed fax or polling job (see Checking and canceling  
waiting jobs on page 46). If the problem continues, ask the telephone company to  
check your telephone line.  
If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone  
line, try changing the Compatibility setting to Basic(for VoIP). (See  
Vertical black lines when sending. Black vertical lines on faxes you send are typically caused by dirt or correction fluid  
on the glass strip. (See Cleaning the scanner on page 149.)  
Handling incoming calls  
C
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
The machine ‘Hears’ a voice as a  
CNG Tone.  
If Easy Receive is set to On, your machine is more sensitive to sounds. It may  
mistakenly interpret certain voices or music on the line as a fax machine calling  
and respond with fax receiving tones. Deactivate the machine by pressing  
Stop/Exit. Try avoiding this problem by turning Easy Receive to Off. (See Easy  
Sending a Fax Call to the machine. If you answered on an external or extension telephone, press your Fax Receive  
Code (the default setting is l51). When your machine answers, hang up.  
Custom features on a single line.  
If you have Call Waiting, Call Waiting/Caller ID, Caller ID, RingMaster, Voice Mail,  
an answering machine, an alarm system or other custom feature on a single  
telephone line with your machine, it may create a problem sending or receiving  
faxes.  
For Example: If you subscribe to Call Waiting or some other custom service and  
its signal comes through the line while your machine is sending or receiving a fax,  
the signal can temporarily interrupt or disrupt the faxes. Brother’s ECM feature  
should help overcome this problem. This condition is related to the telephone  
system industry and is common to all devices that send and receive information  
on a single, shared line with custom features. If avoiding a slight interruption is  
crucial to your business, a separate line with no custom features is recommended.  
Menu access difficulties  
C
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
The machine beeps when you try to  
access the Setup Receive and  
Setup Send menus.  
If Fax  
is not illuminated, press it to turn on Fax mode. The Setup Receive  
setting (Menu, 2, 1) and Setup Send setting (Menu, 2, 2) are available only when  
the machine is in Fax mode.  
120  
 
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
Copy difficulties  
C
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
Cannot make a copy.  
Make sure that Copy  
is illuminated. (See Entering copy mode  
Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock settings.  
C
Vertical black line appears in  
copies.  
Black vertical lines on copies are typically caused by dirt or correction fluid on the  
glass strip, or the corona wire for printing is dirty. (See Cleaning the scanner  
Printing difficulties  
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
No printout.  
Check that the machine is plugged in and the power switch is turned on.  
Check that the toner cartridge and drum unit are installed properly. (See  
Check the interface cable connection on both the machine and your computer.  
(See the Quick Setup Guide.)  
Check that the correct printer driver has been installed and chosen.  
Check to see if the LCD is showing an error message. (See Error and  
Check that the machine is online: (Windows Vista®) Click the Start button,  
Control Panel, Hardware and Sound, and then Printers. Right-click  
Brother MFC-XXXX Printer. Make sure that Use Printer Offline is  
unchecked. (Windows® XP and Windows Server® 2003) Click the Start  
button and choose Printers and Faxes. Right-click  
Brother MFC-XXXX Printer. Make sure that Use Printer Offline is  
unchecked. (Windows® 2000) Click the Start button and choose Settings and  
then Printers. Right-click Brother MFC-XXXX Printer. Make sure that  
Use Printer Offline is unchecked.  
Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock settings.  
The machine prints unexpectedly  
or it prints garbage.  
Pull out the paper tray and wait until the machine stops printing. Then turn off  
the machine’s power switch and disconnect from the power for several  
minutes. (The machine can be turned off for approximately 60 hours without  
losing faxes stored in the memory.)  
Check the settings in your application to make sure it is set up to work with  
your machine.  
If you are using the parallel port connection, check that the port is BRMFC and  
not LPT1.  
The machine prints the first couple  
of pages correctly, then some  
pages have text missing.  
Check the settings in your application to make sure that it is set up to work with  
your machine.  
Your computer is not recognizing the machine’s input buffer’s full signal. Make  
sure that you connected the interface cable correctly. (See the Quick Setup  
Guide.)  
The headers or footers appear  
There is an unprintable area on the top and bottom of the page. Adjust the top and  
when the document displays on the bottom margins in your document to allow for this.  
screen but they do not show up  
when it is printed.  
121  
   
Printing difficulties (continued)  
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
The machine does not print on both Check the paper size setting in the printer driver. You need to choose A4, Letter,  
sides of the paper even though the Legal or Folio.  
printer driver setting is Duplex.  
The machine is not printing or has Press Job Cancel.  
stopped printing and the machine’s  
As the machine cancels the job and clears it from the memory it may produce an  
status LED is yellow.  
incomplete printout.  
Scanning difficulties  
C
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
TWAIN errors appear while  
scanning.  
Make sure that the Brother TWAIN driver is chosen as the primary source. In  
PaperPort™ 11SE, click File, Scan or Get Photo and choose the  
Brother TWAIN driver.  
OCR does not work.  
Try increasing the scanning resolution.  
Network scanning does not work.  
Software difficulties  
C
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
Cannot install software or print.  
Run the Repair MFL-Pro Suite program on the CD-ROM. This program will repair  
and reinstall the software.  
Cannot perform ‘2 in 1’ or ‘4 in 1’  
printing.  
Check that the paper size setting in the application and in the printer driver are the  
same.  
The machine does not print from  
Adobe® llustrator®.  
Try to reduce the print resolution. (See Advanced tab in the Software User’s Guide  
on the CD-ROM.)  
‘Unable to write to LPT1’, ‘LPT1  
already in use’ or ‘MFC is Busy’  
error message appears.  
Make sure that the machine is on (plugged into the AC power outlet and the power  
switch turned on) and that it is connected directly to the computer using the IEEE-  
1284 bi-directional parallel cable. The cable must not go through another  
peripheral device (such as a Zip Drive, external CD-ROM Drive, or switch box).  
Make sure that the LCD does not show an error message.  
Make sure no other device drivers, which also communicate through the parallel  
port, are running automatically when you turn on the computer (such as, drivers  
for Zip Drives, external CD-ROM Drive, etc.) Suggested areas to check: (Load=,  
Run=command lines in the win.ini file or the Setup Group.)  
Check with your computer manufacturer to confirm that the computer’s parallel  
port settings in the BIOS are set to support a bi-directional machine; i.e. (Parallel  
Port Mode – ECP)  
122  
   
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
Paper handling difficulties  
C
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
The machine does not load paper.  
If there is no paper, load a new stack of paper into the paper tray.  
The LCD shows No Paperor a  
Paper Jam message.  
If there is paper in the paper tray, make sure it is straight. If the paper is curled,  
you should straighten it. Sometimes it is helpful to remove the paper, turn the  
stack over and put it back into the paper tray.  
C
Reduce the amount of paper in the paper tray, and then try again.  
Check that the MP tray mode is not chosen in the printer driver.  
If the LCD shows Paper Jam message and you still have a problem, see  
The machine does not feed paper  
from the MP tray.  
Fan the paper well and put it back in the tray firmly.  
Make sure that MP tray mode is chosen in the printer driver.  
How do I print on envelopes?  
You can load envelopes from the MP tray. Your application must be set up to print  
the envelope size you are using. This is usually done in the Page Setup or  
Document Setup menu of your application. (See your application’s manual for  
more information.)  
What paper can I use?  
You can use thin paper, plain paper, thick paper, bond paper, recycled paper,  
envelops, labels and transparencies that are made for laser machines. (For  
There is a paper jam.  
Print quality difficulties  
C
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
Printed pages are curled.  
Low quality thin or thick paper or not printing on the recommended side of the  
paper could cause this problem. Try turning over the stack of paper in the  
paper tray.  
Make sure that you choose the Paper Type that suits the print media type you  
Printed pages are smeared.  
Printouts are too light.  
The Paper Type setting may be incorrect for the type of print media you are using,  
or the print media may be too thick or have a rough surface. (See Acceptable  
paper and other print media on page 15 and Basic tab in the Software User’s  
Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
If this problem occurs when making copies or printing received faxes, turn  
Toner Save mode to Off in the machine menu settings. (See Toner Save  
Set Toner Save mode to Off in the Advanced tab in the printer driver. (See  
Advanced tab in the Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
Network difficulties  
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
Cannot print over a wired Network. If you are having Network problems see the Network User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM for more information.  
Make sure your machine is powered on and is on-line and in the Ready state.  
Print the Network Configuration list to see your current Network settings. (See  
How to print a report on page 80.) Reconnect the LAN cable to the hub to verify  
that the cable and network connections are good. If possible, try connecting the  
machine to a different port on your hub using a different cable. If the connections  
are good, the lower LED of the back panel of the machine will be green.  
123  
       
Network difficulties (continued)  
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
(Windows®) The firewall setting on your PC may be rejecting the necessary  
network connection. Follow the instructions below to configure your firewall. If  
you are using a personal firewall software, see the User’s Guide for your software  
or contact the software manufacturer.  
The network scanning feature  
does not work.  
The network PC Fax Receive  
feature does not work.  
(Windows® XP SP2)  
The network printing feature does  
not work.  
a
Click the Start button, Control Panel,  
Network and Internet Connections and then Windows Firewall. Make  
sure that Windows Firewall on the General tab is set to On.  
b
Click the Advanced tab and Settings... button of the  
Network Connection Settings.  
c
d
Click the Add button.  
To add port 54925 for network scanning, enter the information below:  
1. In Description of service:: Enter any description, for example “Brother  
Scanner”.  
2. In Name or IP address (for example 192.168.0.12) of the computer  
hosting this service on your network: Enter “Localhost”.  
3. In External Port number for this service: Enter “54925”.  
4. In Internal Port number for this service: Enter “54925”.  
5. Make sure UDP is chosen.  
6. Click OK.  
e
f
Click the Add button.  
To add port 54926 for network PC Fax, enter the information below:  
1. In Description of service: Enter any description, for example “Brother  
PC Fax”.  
2. In Name or IP address (for example 192.168.0.12) of the computer  
hosting this service on your network: Enter “Localhost”.  
3. In External Port number for this service: Enter “54926”.  
4. In Internal Port number for this service: Enter “54926”.  
5. Make sure UDP is chosen.  
6. Click OK.  
g
h
If you still have trouble with your network connection, click the Add button.  
To add port 137 for network scanning, network printing and network PC  
Fax receiving, enter the information below:  
1. In Description of service: - Enter any description, for example “Brother  
PC Fax receiving”.  
2. In Name or IP address (for example 192.168.0.12) of the computer  
hosting this service on your network: Enter “Localhost”.  
3. In External Port number for this service: Enter “137”.  
4. In Internal Port number for this service: Enter “137”.  
5. Make sure UDP is chosen.  
6. Click OK.  
i
Make sure if the new setting is added and is checked, and then click OK.  
124  
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
Network difficulties (continued)  
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
(Windows Vista®):  
The network scanning feature  
does not work.  
a
b
Click the Start button, Control Panel, Network and Internet,  
Windows Firewall and click Change settings.  
The network PC Fax Receive  
feature does not work.  
C
The network printing feature does  
not work.  
When the User Account Control screen appears, do the following.  
Users who have administrator rights: Click Continue.  
(continued)  
For users who do not have administrator rights: Enter the  
administrator password and click OK.  
c
d
e
f
Make sure that Windows Firewall on the General tab is set to On.  
Click the Exceptions tab.  
Click the Add port... button.  
To add port 54925 for network scanning, enter the information below:  
1. In Name: Enter any description. (for example “Brother Scanner”)  
2. In Port number: Enter “54925”.  
3. Make sure UDP is chosen. Then click OK.  
g
h
Click the Add port... button.  
To add port 54926 for Network PC Fax, enter the information below:  
1. In Name: Enter any description. (for example “Brother PC Fax”)  
2. In Port number: Enter “54926”.  
3. Make sure UDP is chosen. Then click OK.  
i
j
Make sure that the new setting is added and is checked, and then click  
Apply.  
If you still have trouble with your network connection such as network  
scanning or printing, check File and Printer Sharing box in the  
Exceptions tab and then click Apply.  
(Windows®) The firewall setting on your PC may be rejecting the necessary  
network connection. (For details, see the instructions above.)  
Your computer cannot find your  
machine.  
(Macintosh®) Re-select your machine in the Device Selector application located  
in Macintosh HD/Library/Printers/Brother/Utilities/DeviceSelector or from  
the Model pop-up menu of ControlCenter2.  
125  
Improving the print quality  
C
Examples of poor print  
quality  
Recommendation  
Make sure that you use paper that meets our specifications. A rough  
surfaced paper or thick print media can cause the problem. (See  
ABCDEFGH  
abcdefghijk  
Make sure that you choose the appropriate media type in the printer  
driver or in the machine’s Paper Type menu setting. (See Acceptable  
paper and other print media on page 15 and Basic tab in the Software  
User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
A B C D  
abcde  
0 1 2 3 4  
The problem may disappear by itself. Print multiple pages to clear this  
problem, especially if the machine has not been used for a long time.  
White lines across the page  
The drum unit may be damaged. Put in a new drum unit. (See  
Wipe the laser scanner windows with a dry, lint-free soft cloth. (See  
ABCDEFGH  
abcdefghijk  
Make sure that a torn sheet of paper is not inside the machine  
covering the scanner window.  
A B C D  
abcde  
0 1 2 3 4  
The toner cartridge may be damaged. Put in a new toner cartridge.  
The drum unit may be damaged. Put in a new drum unit. (See  
White lines down the page  
Make sure that you use paper that meets our specifications. (See  
Choose Thick paper mode in the printer driver, choose Thickin the  
machine’s Paper Type menu setting or use thinner paper than you  
are currently using. (See Paper Type on page 23 and Basic tab in the  
Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as high humidity  
can cause hollow print. (See Choosing a location on page 100.)  
Hollow print  
The drum unit may be damaged. Put in a new drum unit. (See  
Make sure that you use paper that meets our specifications. (See  
ABCDEFGH  
abcdefghijk  
Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as high  
temperatures and high humidity can increase the amount of  
background shading. (See Choosing a location on page 100.)  
A B C D  
abcde  
0 1 2 3 4  
The toner cartridge may be damaged. Put in a new toner cartridge.  
The drum unit may be damaged. Put in a new drum unit. (See  
Gray background  
126  
   
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
Examples of poor print  
quality  
Recommendation  
Make sure that the paper or other print media is loaded properly in the  
paper tray and that the guides are not too tight or too loose against  
the paper stack.  
ABCDEFGH  
abcdefghijk  
Set the paper guides correctly. (See Loading paper in the standard  
C
A B C D  
abcde  
0 1 2 3 4  
If you are using the MP tray, see Loading paper in the multi-purpose  
The paper tray may be too full.  
Page skewed  
Check the paper type and quality. (See Acceptable paper and other  
Make sure that you use paper that meets our specifications. Rough-  
surfaced paper or thick paper may cause the problem. (See  
Make sure that you choose the proper media type in the printer driver  
or in the machine’s Paper Type menu setting. (See Acceptable paper  
and other print media on page 15 and Basic tab in the Software  
User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
The drum unit may be damaged. Put in a new drum unit. (See  
Ghost  
The fuser unit may be contaminated. Call Brother Customer Service  
at 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437) (in USA) or 1-877-BROTHER  
(in Canada).  
Check the paper type and quality. (See Acceptable paper and other  
B DEFGH  
abc efghijk  
Make sure that paper is loaded properly. (See Loading paper in the  
A C D  
bcde  
1 3 4  
Turn over the stack of paper in the tray or rotate the paper 180° in the  
input tray.  
Wrinkles or creases  
127  
Examples of poor print  
quality  
Recommendation  
a
b
Open the back cover.  
Pull the blue lever until the mark (c) reaches beside the mark (  
as shown below.  
)
c
Resend the print job.  
Envelope Creases  
Note  
When you have finished printing, open the back cover and reset the  
two blue levers back to their original position.  
Check the paper type and quality. High temperatures and high  
humidity will cause paper to curl.  
If you do not use the machine often, the paper may have been in the  
paper tray too long. Turn over the stack of paper in the paper tray.  
Also, fan the paper stack and then rotate the paper 180° in the paper  
tray.  
Curled or wavy  
128  
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
Examples of poor print  
quality  
Recommendation  
Turn the paper over in the paper tray, and print again. (Excluding  
Letterhead paper) If the problem remains, switch the Anti-Curl Lever  
as follows:  
1
Open the back cover.  
C
Curled  
2
Lift the lever (1) and slide the lever (2) in the direction of the arrow.  
1
2
Lift up the Output Tray Support Flap (1).  
1
Choose Reduce Paper Curl mode in the printer driver. (See Other  
®
®
Print Options (For Windows ) or Print Settings(For Macintosh ) in  
the Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
129  
Examples of poor print  
quality  
Recommendation  
Make ten copies of a blank, white sheet of paper. (See Making  
multiple copies on page 82.) If the problem is not solved, the drum  
unit may have glue from a label stuck on the OPC drum surface.  
Clean the drum unit. (See Cleaning the drum unit on page 152.)  
The drum unit may be damaged. Put in a new drum. (See Replacing  
White Spots on black text  
and graphics at 3.7 in.  
(94 mm) intervals  
Black Spots at 3.7 in.  
(94 mm) intervals  
Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as humidity, high  
temperatures, and so on, may cause this print fault. (See Choosing a  
ABCDEFGH  
abcdefghijk  
If the whole page is too light, Toner Save mode may be on. Turn off  
Toner Save mode in the machine menu settings or Toner Save mode  
in the printer Properties of the driver. (See Toner Save on page 27  
or Advanced tab in the Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
A B C D  
abcde  
0 1 2 3 4  
Clean the scanner window and the corona wire of the drum unit. (See  
Faint  
The toner cartridge may be damaged. Put in a new toner cartridge.  
The drum unit may be damaged. Put in a new drum unit. (See  
Make sure that you use paper that meets our specifications. Rough-  
surfaced paper may cause the problem. (See Acceptable paper and  
ABCDEFGH  
abcdefghijk  
Clean the corona wire and the drum unit. (See Cleaning the corona  
A B C D  
abcde  
0 1 2 3 4  
The drum unit may be damaged. Put in a new drum unit. (See  
The fuser unit may be contaminated. Call Brother Customer Service  
at 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437) (in USA)  
or 1-877-BROTHER (in Canada).  
Toner specks  
130  
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
Examples of poor print  
quality  
Recommendation  
Clean the corona wire inside the drum unit by sliding the blue tab. Be  
sure to return the blue tab to the home position (a). (See Cleaning the  
The drum unit may be damaged. Put in a new drum unit. (See  
C
The fuser unit may be contaminated. Call Brother Customer Service  
at 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437) (in USA)  
or 1-877-BROTHER (in Canada).  
All black  
Make sure that you use paper that meets our specifications. (See  
ABCDEFGH  
abcdefghijk  
If you use label sheets for laser machines, the glue from the sheets  
may sometimes stick to the OPC drum surface. Clean the drum unit.  
A B C D  
abcde  
0 1 2 3 4  
Do not use paper that has clips or staples because they will scratch  
the surface of the drum.  
If the unpacked drum unit is in direct sunlight or room light, the unit  
Black toner marks across the  
page  
may be damaged.  
The toner cartridge may be damaged. Put in a new toner cartridge.  
The drum unit may be damaged. Put in a new drum unit. (See  
Clean the laser scanner window and the corona wire inside the drum  
ABCDEFGH  
abcdefghijk  
The drum unit may be damaged. Put in a new drum unit. (See  
A B C D  
abcde  
0 1 2 3 4  
Line across the page  
Clean the corona wire inside the drum unit by sliding the blue tab. Be  
sure to return the blue tab to the home position (a). (See Cleaning the  
ABCDEFGH  
abcdefghijk  
The toner cartridge may be damaged. Put in a new toner cartridge.  
A B C D  
abcde  
0 1 2 3 4  
The drum unit may be damaged. Put in a new drum unit. (See  
The fuser unit may be smudged. Call Brother Customer Service  
at 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437) (in USA)  
or 1-877-BROTHER (in Canada).  
Black lines down the page  
Printed pages have toner  
stains down the page  
131  
Examples of poor print  
quality  
Recommendation  
Open the back cover and make sure that the two blue levers on the  
left and right hand sides are in the up position.  
ABCDEFGH  
abcdefghijk  
A B C D  
abcde  
0 1 2 3 4  
Poor fixing  
Choose Improve Toner Fixing mode in the printer driver. (See Other  
®
®
Print Options (For Windows ) or Print Settings (For Macintosh ) in  
the Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
If this selection does not provide enough improvement, choose  
Thicker Paper in Media Type setting.  
132  
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
Setting Dial Tone detection  
C
Telephone line interference  
C
Setting the Dial Tone to Detectionwill  
shorten the Dial Tone detect pause.  
If you are having difficulty sending or  
receiving a fax due to possible interference  
on the telephone line, we recommend that  
you adjust the Equalization for compatibility  
to reduce the modem speed for fax  
operations.  
a (USA) Press Menu, 0, 4.  
(Canada) Press Menu, 0, 5.  
C
04.Dial Tone  
a Press Menu, 2, 0, 1.  
a
b
Detection  
No Detection  
Select ab or OK  
20.Miscellaneous  
1.Compatibility  
a
High  
Normal  
b Press a or b to choose Detectionor  
No Detection.  
b
Select ab or OK  
Press OK.  
b Press a or b to choose  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
Basic(for VoIP), Normalor High.  
Basic(for VoIP)cuts the  
modem speed to 9600 bps. and  
turns the error correction mode  
(ECM) off.  
For a standard telephone line: If you  
regularly experience interference on  
your standard telephone line try this  
setting.  
If you are using VoIP: VoIP service  
providers offer fax support using  
various standards. If you regularly  
experience fax transmission errors  
try this setting.  
Normalsets the modem speed at  
14400 bps.  
Highsets the modem speed at  
33600 bps.  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
When you change the Compatibility to  
Basic(for VoIP), the ECM feature is  
not available.  
133  
     
Error and maintenance messages  
C
As with any sophisticated office product, errors may occur and consumable items may need to be  
replaced. If this happens, your machine identifies the error or required routine maintenance and  
shows the appropriate message. The most common error and maintenance messages are shown  
below.  
You can correct most errors and perform routine maintenance by yourself. If you need more help,  
the Brother Solutions Center offers the latest FAQs and troubleshooting tips.  
Error Message  
Cause  
Action  
Access Error  
The device is removed from the  
USB direct interface while the  
data is processing.  
Press Stop/Exit. Reinsert the device and try  
to print with Direct Print.  
Cartridge Error  
Comm.Error  
The toner cartridge is not installed Pull out the drum unit, take out the toner  
properly.  
cartridge that is indicated on the LCD, and  
put it back into the drum unit again.  
Poor telephone line quality  
caused a communication error.  
Send the fax again or connect the machine  
to another telephone line. If the problem  
continues, call the telephone company and  
ask them to check your telephone line.  
Connection Fail  
You tried to poll a fax machine  
that is not in Polled Waiting mode.  
Check the other fax machine’s polling setup.  
Cooling Down  
The temperature of the drum unit Make sure that you can hear the fan in the  
or toner cartridge is too hot. The machine spinning and that the exhaust outlet  
Wait for a while  
machine will pause its current  
print job and go into cooling down  
mode. During the cooling down  
mode, you will hear the cooling  
fan running while the LCD shows  
Cooling Down, and  
is not blocked by something.  
If the fan is spinning, remove any obstacles  
that surround the exhaust outlet, and then  
leave the machine turned on but do not use  
it for several minutes.  
If the fan is not spinning disconnect the  
machine from the power for several minutes,  
then reconnect it. (The machine can be  
turned off for approximately 60 hours without  
losing faxes stored in the memory. See  
Wait for a while.  
Cover is Open  
Cover is Open  
The front cover is not closed  
completely.  
Close the front cover of the machine.  
The fuser cover is not closed  
completely or paper was jammed  
in the back of the machine when  
you turned on the power.  
Close the fuser cover of the machine.  
Make sure paper is not jammed inside  
the back of the machine, and then close  
the fuser cover and press Start.  
Disconnected  
The other person or other  
person’s fax machine stopped the  
call.  
Try to send or receive again.  
134  
     
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
Error Message  
Cause  
Action  
Document Jam  
The document was not inserted  
or fed properly, or the document the automatic document feeder (ADF)  
scanned from the ADF was too  
long.  
DR Mode in Use  
Drum Error  
The machine is set to Distinctive Set Distinctive Ring to Off. (See Turning off  
C
Ring mode. You cannot change  
the Receive Mode from Manual to  
another mode.  
The corona wire on the drum unit Clean the corona wire on the drum unit. (See  
needs to be cleaned.  
The drum unit has reached the  
end of its life.  
Replace the drum unit. (See Replacing the  
Duplex Disabled  
Fuser Error  
The duplex tray is not installed  
properly.  
Remove the duplex tray and install it again.  
The temperature of fuser unit  
does not rise at a specified  
Turn the power switch off, wait a few  
seconds, and then turn it on again. Leave the  
temperature within specified time. machine for 15 minutes with the power on.  
The machine can be turned off for  
The fuser unit is too hot.  
approximately 60 hours without losing faxes  
Jam Duplex  
Jam Rear  
The paper is jammed in the  
duplex tray.  
The paper is jammed in the back (See Paper jams on page 142.)  
of the machine.  
Jam Inside  
Jam MP Tray  
The paper is jammed inside the  
machine.  
The paper is jammed in the MP  
tray of the machine.  
Jam Tray 1  
Jam Tray 2  
No Paper  
The paper is jammed in the paper (See Paper jams on page 142.)  
tray of the machine.  
The machine is out of paper or  
paper is not properly loaded in the  
paper tray.  
Do one of the following:  
Refill the paper in the paper tray or MP  
tray.  
Remove the paper and load it again.  
No Response/Busy  
No Toner  
The number you dialed does not Verify the number and try again.  
answer or is busy.  
The toner cartridge or the drum  
Re-install the toner cartridge or the drum unit  
unit and toner cartridge assembly and toner cartridge assembly.  
is not installed properly.  
No Tray  
The paper tray is not completely Close the paper tray properly.  
closed.  
135  
 
Error Message  
Cause  
Action  
Out of Memory  
The machine’s memory is full.  
Fax sending or copy operation in  
progress  
Do one of the following:  
Press Start to send or copy the scanned  
pages.  
Press Stop/Exit and wait until the other  
operations in progress finish, and then try  
again.  
Clear the data from the memory. (See  
Print operation in process  
Do one of the following:  
Reduce print resolution. (See Advanced  
tab in the Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.)  
Clear the faxes from the memory. (See  
Print Unable XX  
The machine has a mechanical  
problem.  
Disconnect the machine from the power for  
several minutes, then reconnect it. (The  
machine can be turned off for approximately  
60 hours without losing faxes stored in the  
Protected Device  
Rename the File  
The protect switch of the USB  
Flash memory drive is on.  
Turn off the protect switch of the USB Flash  
memory drive.  
There is already a file on the USB Change the file name of the file on the USB  
Flash memory drive with the  
same name as the file you are  
trying to save.  
Flash memory drive or the file you are trying  
to save.  
Replace Parts  
Drum  
The drum unit is the end of its life. Replace the drum unit.  
The drum unit counter was not  
reset when a new drum was  
installed.  
1
Open the front cover, and then press  
Clear/Back.  
2
Press 1 to reset.  
Replace Parts  
Fuser Unit  
It is time to replace the fuser unit. Call Brother Customer Service to replace the  
fuser unit.  
1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437) (in U.S.A  
)
1-877-BROTHER (in Canada  
)
136  
   
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
Error Message  
Replace Parts  
Laser Unit  
Cause  
Action  
It is time to replace the laser unit. Call Brother Customer Service to replace the  
laser unit.  
1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437) (in U.S.A  
)
1-877-BROTHER (in Canada  
)
C
Replace Parts  
PF Kit MP  
It is time to replace the paper  
feeding kit for the MP tray.  
Call Brother Customer Service to replace the  
PF Kit MP.  
1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437) (in U.S.A  
)
1-877-BROTHER (in Canada  
)
Replace Parts  
PF Kit 1  
It is time to replace the paper  
feeding kit for Tray 1.  
Call Brother Customer Service to replace the  
PF Kit 1.  
1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437) (in U.S.A  
)
1-877-BROTHER (in Canada  
)
Replace Parts  
PF Kit 2  
It is time to replace the paper  
feeding kit for Tray 2.  
Call Brother Customer Service to replace the  
PF Kit 2.  
1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437) (in U.S.A  
1-877-BROTHER (in Canada  
The toner cartridge is at the end Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.  
)
)
Replace Toner  
Scan Unable XX  
of its life and printing is not  
possible.  
The machine has a mechanical  
problem.  
Disconnect the machine from the power for  
several minutes, then reconnect it. (The  
machine can be turned off for approximately  
60 hour without losing faxes stored in the  
Document is too long for duplex  
scanning.  
Press Stop/Exit. Use the suitable size of  
paper for duplex scanning. (See Scan  
Scanner Locked  
The scanner lock is locked.  
Open the document cover, and then release  
the scanner lock lever.  
Press Stop/Exit.  
137  
 
Error Message  
Cause  
Action  
Size mismatch  
The paper in the tray is not the  
correct size.  
Load the correct size of paper in the tray and  
set the “Paper Size” (Menu, 1, 2, 2 (See  
Toner Low  
If the LCD shows Toner Low,  
you can still print; however, the  
machine is telling you that the  
toner cartridge is near the end of  
its life.  
Order a new toner cartridge now.  
Too Many Files  
Too Many Trays  
Unusable Device  
There are too many files stored  
on the USB Flash memory drive. USB Flash memory drive.  
Reduce the number of files stored on the  
More than one optional tray is  
installed.  
The maximum number of optional trays is  
one. Remove any additional trays.  
An incompatible or broken device Remove the USB Flash memory drive from  
has been connected to the USB  
direct interface.  
the USB direct interface.  
138  
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
a Make sure that you have installed  
MFL-Pro Suite on your PC, and then  
turn on PC-Fax Receiving on the PC.  
(For details about PC Fax Receive, see  
PC-FAX receiving in the Software  
User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
Transferring your faxes or Fax  
Journal report  
C
If the LCD shows:  
Print Unable XX  
Scan Unable XX  
C
b Make sure that you have set  
PC Fax Receiveon the machine.  
If faxes are in the machine’s memory  
when you set up PC Fax Receive, the  
LCD will ask if you want to transfer the  
faxes to your PC.  
We recommend transferring your faxes to  
another fax machine or to your PC. (See  
You can also transfer the Fax Journal report  
to see if there are any faxes you need to  
c Do one of the following:  
To transfer all faxes to your PC,  
press 1. You will be asked if you want  
a backup print.  
Note  
If there is an error message on the  
machine’s LCD, after the faxes have been  
transferred, disconnect the machine from  
the power source for several minutes, and  
then reconnect it.  
To exit and leave the faxes in the  
memory, press 2.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
Transferring Fax Journal report to  
another fax machine  
C
Transferring faxes to another fax  
machine  
If you have not set up your Station ID, you  
cannot enter fax transfer mode. (See Setting  
your station ID in the Quick Setup Guide.)  
C
If you have not set up your Station ID, you  
cannot enter fax transfer mode. (See Setting  
your station ID in the Quick Setup Guide.)  
a Press Menu, 9, 0, 2.  
a Press Menu, 9, 0, 1.  
b Enter the fax number to which the Fax  
Journal report will be forwarded.  
b Do one of the following:  
c Press Start.  
If the LCD shows No Data, there  
are no faxes left in the machine’s  
memory. Press Stop/Exit.  
Enter the fax number to which faxes  
will be forwarded.  
c Press Start.  
Transferring faxes to your PC  
C
You can transfer the faxes from your  
machine’s memory to your PC.  
139  
         
Document is jammed under the  
document cover  
Document jams  
C
C
If the document is jammed, follow the steps  
below.  
a Take out any paper from the ADF that is  
not jammed.  
IMPORTANT  
After removing a jammed document,  
check that no paper scraps are left in the  
machine that could cause another jam.  
b Lift the document cover.  
c Pull the jammed document out to the  
right.  
Document is jammed in the top of the  
ADF unit  
C
a Take out any paper from the ADF that is  
not jammed.  
b Open the ADF cover.  
c Pull the jammed document out to the  
left.  
d Close the document cover.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
d Close the ADF cover.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
140  
   
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
Document is jammed at the output  
tray  
C
a Take out any paper from the ADF that is  
not jammed.  
b Pull the jammed document out to the  
C
right.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
Document is jammed in the duplex  
slot  
C
a Take out any paper from the ADF that is  
not jammed.  
b Pull the jammed document out to the  
right.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
141  
 
Paper jams  
C
IMPORTANT  
To prevent damage to the machine  
caused by static electricity, DO NOT touch  
the electrodes shown in the illustration.  
To clear paper jams, please follow the steps  
in this section.  
IMPORTANT  
Please confirm that you have installed  
both a toner cartridge and a drum unit in  
the machine. If you have not installed a  
drum unit or have installed the drum unit  
improperly, then this may cause a paper  
jam in your Brother machine.  
Note  
The LCD names for the paper trays are as  
follows:  
Note  
If the error message remains, open and  
close the front cover and fuser cover firmly  
to reset the machine.  
• Standard paper tray: Tray 1  
• Optional lower tray: Tray 2  
• Multi-purpose tray: MP Tray  
CAUTION  
HOT SURFACE  
Paper is jammed in the MP tray  
C
After you have just used the machine, some  
internal parts of the machine will be  
extremely hot. To prevent injury, when you  
open the front or back cover (back output  
tray) of the machine DO NOT touch the  
shaded parts shown in the illustration. If you  
do this you may get burned.  
If the LCD shows Jam MP Tray, follow  
these steps:  
a Remove the paper from the MP tray.  
b Remove any jammed paper from in and  
around the MP tray.  
c Close the MP tray. Then open the front  
cover and close it to reset the machine.  
Open the MP tray again.  
142  
   
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
d Fan the paper stack, and then put it back  
For Jam Tray 2:  
in the MP tray.  
C
e When loading paper in the MP tray,  
make sure that the paper stays under  
the maximum paper height guides on  
both sides of the tray.  
b Use both hands to slowly pull out the  
jammed paper.  
Paper is jammed in Paper Tray 1 or  
Tray 2  
C
If the LCD shows Jam Tray 1or  
Jam Tray 2, follow these steps:  
a Pull the paper tray completely out of the  
machine.  
c Make sure the paper is below the  
maximum paper mark (b) of the paper  
tray. While pressing the blue paper-  
guide release lever, slide the paper  
guides to fit the paper size. Make sure  
that the guides are firmly in the slots.  
For Jam Tray 1:  
d Put the paper tray firmly back in the  
machine.  
IMPORTANT  
DO NOT take out the standard paper tray  
while paper is feeding from a lower paper  
tray as this will cause a paper jam.  
143  
d Slowly take out the drum unit and toner  
cartridge assembly. The jammed paper  
may be pulled out with the drum unit and  
toner cartridge assembly, or this may  
release the paper so you can pull it out  
of the paper tray opening.  
Paper is jammed inside the machine  
C
a Pull the paper tray completely out of the  
machine.  
b Use both hands to slowly pull out the  
jammed paper.  
c Press the front cover release button and  
open the front cover.  
IMPORTANT  
We recommend that you place the drum  
unit and toner cartridge assembly on a  
clean, flat surface with a sheet of  
disposable paper or cloth underneath it in  
case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.  
To prevent damage to the machine from  
static electricity, DO NOT touch the  
electrodes shown in the illustration.  
144  
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
e Put the drum unit and toner cartridge  
IMPORTANT  
assembly back in the machine.  
We recommend that you place the drum  
unit and toner cartridge assembly on a  
clean, flat surface with a sheet of  
disposable paper or cloth underneath it in  
case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.  
C
c Push down the blue lock lever and take  
the toner cartridge out of the drum unit.  
Take out the jammed paper if there is  
any inside the drum unit.  
f Close the front cover.  
g Put the paper tray firmly back in the  
machine.  
Paper is jammed inside the drum unit  
and toner cartridge assembly  
C
a Press the front cover release button and  
open the front cover.  
IMPORTANT  
• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If  
toner scatters on your hands or clothes,  
wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.  
• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT  
touch the shaded parts shown in the  
illustrations below.  
b Slowly take out the drum unit and toner  
cartridge assembly.  
d Clear the jammed paper if there is any  
inside the drum unit.  
145  
e Put the toner cartridge back into the  
drum unit until you hear it lock into place.  
If you put it in properly, the blue lock  
lever will lift automatically.  
b Slowly take out the drum unit and toner  
cartridge assembly.  
f Put the drum unit and toner cartridge  
IMPORTANT  
assembly back in the machine.  
We recommend that you place the drum  
unit and toner cartridge assembly on a  
clean, flat surface with a sheet of  
disposable paper or cloth underneath it in  
case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.  
c Open the back cover (back output tray).  
g Close the front cover.  
Paper is jammed at the back of the  
machine  
C
a Press the front cover release button and  
open the front cover.  
d Pull the tabs at the left and right hand  
sides toward you to open the fuser  
cover (1).  
1
146  
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
e Pull the jammed paper out of the fuser  
Paper is jammed in the duplex tray  
C
unit.  
a Pull the duplex tray completely out of the  
machine.  
C
f Close the fuser cover and back cover  
(back output tray).  
g Put the drum unit and toner cartridge  
b Pull the jammed paper out of the  
assembly back in the machine.  
machine or the duplex tray.  
h Close the front cover.  
c Put the duplex tray back in the machine.  
147  
c Wipe the outside of the machine with a  
Routine maintenance  
C
dry, lint-free soft cloth to remove dust.  
WARNING  
Use neutral detergents.  
DO NOT use cleaning materials that  
contain ammonia, alcohol, any type of  
spray, or any type of flammable substance  
to clean the outside or inside of the  
machine. Doing this may cause a fire or  
electrical shock. (For more information see  
d Remove anything that is stuck inside the  
paper tray.  
e Wipe the inside and the outside of the  
paper tray with a dry, lint-free soft cloth  
to remove dust.  
IMPORTANT  
The drum unit contains toner, so handle it  
carefully. If toner scatters on your hands  
or clothes, wipe or wash it off with cold  
water at once.  
Cleaning the outside of the  
machine  
C
f Re-load the paper and put the paper tray  
firmly back in the machine.  
a Turn off the machine’s power switch.  
Unplug the telephone line cord first,  
disconnect all cables, and then unplug  
the power cord from the AC power  
outlet.  
g Plug the machine’s power cord back into  
the AC power outlet first, and reconnect  
all cables and telephone line cord. Turn  
on the machine’s power switch.  
b Pull the paper tray completely out of the  
machine.  
148  
   
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
d Plug the machine’s power cord back into  
the AC power outlet first, and reconnect  
all cables and telephone line cord. Turn  
on the machine’s power switch.  
Cleaning the scanner  
C
a Turn off the machine’s power switch.  
Unplug the telephone line cord first,  
disconnect all cables and then unplug  
the power cord from the AC power  
outlet.  
Note  
C
In addition to cleaning the scanner glass  
and glass strip with a soft lint-free cloth  
moistened with water, run your finger tip  
over the glass to see if you can feel  
anything on it. If you feel dirt or debris,  
clean the glass again concentrating on  
that area. You may need to repeat the  
cleaning process three or four times. To  
test, make a copy after each cleaning.  
b Lift the document cover (1).  
Clean the white plastic surface (2) and  
scanner glass (3) underneath it with a  
soft lint-free cloth moistened with water.  
1
2
3
Cleaning the laser scanner  
window  
C
WARNING  
DO NOT use cleaning materials that  
contain ammonia, alcohol, any type of  
spray, or any type of flammable substance  
to clean the inside or outside of the  
machine. Doing this may cause a fire or  
electrical shock.  
c In the ADF unit, clean the white bar (1)  
and the scanner glass strip (2)  
underneath it with a soft lint-free cloth  
moistened with water.  
IMPORTANT  
DO NOT touch the laser scanner window  
with your fingers.  
1
2
a Before you clean the inside of the  
machine, turn off the machine’s power  
switch. Unplug the telephone line cord  
first, and then unplug the power cord  
from the AC power outlet.  
149  
       
b Open the front cover and slowly take out  
the drum unit and toner cartridge  
assembly.  
• We recommend that you place the drum  
unit on a clean, flat surface with a sheet of  
disposable paper or cloth underneath it in  
case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.  
c Wipe the laser scanner window (1) by  
wiping it with a dry, lint-free soft cloth.  
CAUTION  
HOT SURFACE  
1
After you have just used the machine, some  
internal parts of the machine will be  
extremely hot. To prevent injury, when you  
open the front or back cover (back output  
tray) of the machine DO NOT touch the  
shaded parts shown in the illustration. If you  
do this you may get burned.  
d Put the drum unit and toner cartridge  
assembly back in the machine.  
IMPORTANT  
• To prevent damage to the machine  
caused by static electricity, DO NOT touch  
the electrodes shown in the illustration.  
e Close the front cover.  
f Plug the machine’s power cord back into  
the AC power outlet first, and then plug  
in the telephone line cord.Turn on the  
machine’s power switch.  
150  
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
c Clean the corona wire inside the drum  
unit by gently sliding the blue tab from  
right to left and left to right several times.  
Cleaning the corona wire  
C
If you have print quality problems, clean the  
corona wire as follows:  
a Turn off the machine’s power switch.  
Unplug the telephone line cord first,  
disconnect all cables, and then unplug  
the power cord from the AC power  
outlet.  
C
1
b Open the front cover and slowly take out  
the drum unit and toner cartridge  
assembly.  
Note  
Be sure to return the blue tab to the home  
position (a) (1). If you do not, printed  
pages may have a vertical stripe.  
d Put the drum unit and toner cartridge  
assembly back in the machine.  
IMPORTANT  
• We recommend that you place the drum  
unit and toner cartridge assembly on a  
clean, flat surface with a sheet of  
disposable paper or cloth underneath it in  
case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.  
• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If  
toner scatters on your hands or clothes,  
wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.  
e Close the front cover.  
• To prevent damage to the machine  
caused by static electricity, DO NOT touch  
the electrodes shown in the illustration.  
151  
   
f Plug the machine’s power cord back into  
the AC power outlet first, and then  
reconnect all cables and telephone line  
cord. Turn on the machine’s power  
switch.  
• To prevent damage to the machine  
caused by static electricity, DO NOT touch  
the electrodes shown in the illustration.  
IMPORTANT  
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT  
touch the shaded parts shown in the  
illustrations below.  
c Push down the blue lock lever and take  
the toner cartridge out of the drum unit.  
Cleaning the drum unit  
C
If you have print quality problems, clean the  
drum unit as follows.  
a Turn off the machine’s power switch.  
Unplug the telephone line cord first, and  
then unplug the power cord from the AC  
power outlet.  
IMPORTANT  
• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If  
toner scatters on your hands or clothes,  
wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.  
b Open the front cover and slowly take out  
the drum unit and toner cartridge  
assembly.  
• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT  
touch the shaded parts shown in the  
illustrations below.  
IMPORTANT  
• We recommend that you put the drum unit  
and toner cartridge assembly on a clean,  
flat surface with a sheet of disposable  
paper or cloth underneath it in case you  
accidentally spill or scatter toner.  
152  
   
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
d Put the print sample in front of the drum  
unit, and find the exact position of the  
poor print.  
g Put the toner cartridge back into the  
drum unit until you hear it lock into place.  
If you put the cartridge in properly, the  
blue lock lever will lift automatically.  
C
e Turn the drum unit gear by hand while  
looking at the surface of the OPC  
drum (1).  
h Put the drum unit and toner cartridge  
assembly back in the machine.  
1
f When you have found the mark on the  
drum that matches the print sample,  
wipe the surface of the OPC drum with a  
dry cotton swab until the dust or glue on  
the surface comes off.  
i Close the front cover.  
j Plug the machine’s power cord back into  
the AC power outlet first, and then  
reconnect all cables and telephone line  
cord. Turn on the machine’s power  
switch.  
IMPORTANT  
• The drum is photosensitive so DO NOT  
touch it with your fingers.  
• DO NOT clean the surface of the  
photosensitive drum with a sharp object.  
• DO NOT use a scrubbing or wiping motion  
because this might damage the drum.  
153  
Replacing the consumable items  
C
You will need to replace the consumable items when the machine indicates that the life of the  
consumable is over.  
Toner cartridge  
Drum unit  
Order No. TN-620, TN-650  
Order No. DR-620  
IMPORTANT  
• We recommend placing used consumable items on a sheet of paper to prevent accidentally  
spilling or scattering the material inside.  
• Be sure to reseal the consumable items tightly so that the material inside does not spill.  
Note  
• Go to http://www.brother.com/original/index.html for instructions on how to return your used  
consumable items to the Brother collection program. If you choose not to return your used  
consumable, please discard the used consumable according to local regulations, keeping it  
separate from domestic waste. If you have questions, call your local waste disposal office.  
• If you use paper that is not a direct equivalent for the recommended paper, the life of  
consumable items and machine parts may be reduced.  
154  
 
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
a Press the front cover release button and  
Replacing a toner cartridge  
C
open the front cover.  
The High Yield toner cartridges can print  
approximately 8,000 pages and the  
Standard toner cartridges can print  
approximately 3,000 pages . Actual page  
C
count will vary depending on your average  
type of document (i.e., standard letter,  
detailed graphics). The machine is supplied  
with the TN-620 toner cartridge that will need  
to be replaced after approximately 3,000  
pages . When a toner cartridge is running  
low, the LCD shows Toner Low.  
b Slowly take out the drum unit and toner  
1
Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance  
cartridge assembly.  
with ISO/IEC 19752.  
Note  
It is a good idea to keep a new toner  
cartridge ready for use when you see the  
Toner Lowwarning.  
CAUTION  
HOT SURFACE  
After you have just used the machine, some  
internal parts of the machine will be  
extremely hot. To prevent injury, when you  
open the front or back cover (back output  
tray) of the machine DO NOT touch the  
shaded parts shown in the illustration. If you  
do this you may get burned.  
IMPORTANT  
• We recommend that you put the drum unit  
and toner cartridge assembly on a clean,  
flat surface with a sheet of disposable  
paper or cloth underneath it in case you  
accidentally spill or scatter toner.  
• To prevent damage to the machine  
caused by static electricity, DO NOT touch  
the electrodes shown in the illustration.  
155  
     
c Push down the blue lock lever and take  
the used toner cartridge out of the drum  
unit.  
IMPORTANT  
• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If  
toner scatters on your hands or clothes,  
wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.  
• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT  
touch the shaded parts shown in the  
illustrations.  
• Brother strongly recommends that you  
DO NOT refill the toner cartridge provided  
with your machine. We also strongly  
recommend that you continue to use only  
Genuine Brother Brand replacement toner  
cartridges. Use or attempted use of  
WARNING  
DO NOT put a toner cartridge into a fire. It  
could explode, resulting in injuries.  
potentially incompatible toner and/or  
cartridges in the Brother machine may  
cause damage to the machine and/or may  
result in unsatisfactory print quality. Our  
warranty coverage does not apply to any  
problem that is caused by the use of  
unauthorized third party toner and/or  
cartridges. To protect your investment and  
obtain premium performance from the  
Brother machine, we strongly recommend  
the use of Genuine Brother Supplies.  
• Wait to unpack the new toner cartridge  
until immediately before you put it in the  
machine. If a toner cartridge is left  
unpacked for a long time, the toner life will  
be shortened.  
• Be sure to seal up the used toner cartridge  
tightly in a suitable bag so that toner  
powder does not spill out of the cartridge.  
156  
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
d Unpack the new toner cartridge. Gently  
shake it from side to side several times  
to distribute the toner evenly inside the  
cartridge.  
g Clean the corona wire of the drum unit  
by gently sliding the blue tab from right  
to left and left to right several times.  
C
1
e Pull off the protective cover.  
Note  
Be sure to return the blue tab to the home  
position (a) (1). If you do not, printed  
pages may have a vertical stripe.  
h Put the drum unit and toner cartridge  
assembly back in the machine.  
f Put the new toner cartridge firmly into  
the drum unit until you hear it lock into  
place. If you put it in properly, the lock  
lever will lift automatically.  
i Close the front cover.  
Note  
DO NOT turn off the machine’s power  
switch or open the front cover until the  
LCD returns to the standby state.  
Note  
Make sure that you put in the toner  
cartridge properly or it may separate from  
the drum unit.  
157  
Replacing the drum unit  
C
CAUTION  
The machine uses a drum unit to create print  
images on paper. If the LCD shows  
Replace Parts Drum, the drum unit is  
near the end of its life and it is time to buy a  
new one. Even if the LCD shows  
Replace Parts Drum, you may be able to  
continue printing without having to replace  
the drum unit for a while. However, if there is  
a noticeable deterioration in the output print  
quality (even before Replace Parts Drum  
appears), then the drum unit should be  
replaced. You should clean the machine  
when you replace the drum unit. (See  
HOT SURFACE  
After you have just used the machine, some  
internal parts of the machine will be  
extremely hot. To prevent injury, when you  
open the front or back cover (back output  
tray) of the machine DO NOT touch the  
shaded parts shown in the illustration. If you  
do this you may get burned.  
IMPORTANT  
While removing the drum unit, handle it  
carefully because it may contain toner. If  
toner scatters on your hands or clothes,  
a Press the front cover release button and  
open the front cover.  
wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.  
Note  
The drum unit is a consumable item, and  
it is necessary to replace it periodically.  
There are many factors that determine the  
actual drum life, such as temperature,  
humidity, type of paper and how much  
toner you use for the number of pages per  
print job. The estimated drum life is  
approximately 25,000 pages . The actual  
b Slowly take out the drum unit and toner  
number of pages your drum will print may  
be significantly less than this estimate.  
Because we have no control over the  
many factors that determine the actual  
drum life, we cannot guarantee a  
minimum number of pages that will be  
printed by your drum.  
cartridge assembly.  
1
Drum yield is approximate, and may vary by type of  
use.  
158  
     
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
e Put the toner cartridge firmly into the  
new drum unit until you hear it lock into  
place. If you put the cartridge in  
properly, the blue lock lever will lift  
automatically.  
IMPORTANT  
• We recommend that you put the drum unit  
and toner cartridge assembly on a clean,  
flat surface with a sheet of disposable  
paper or cloth underneath it in case you  
accidentally spill or scatter toner.  
C
• To prevent damage to the machine  
caused by static electricity, DO NOT touch  
the electrodes shown in the illustration.  
Note  
Make sure that you put in the toner  
cartridge properly or it may separate from  
the drum unit.  
f Clean the corona wire of the drum unit  
by gently sliding the blue tab from right  
to left and left to right several times.  
c Push down the blue lock lever and take  
the toner cartridge out of the drum unit.  
IMPORTANT  
• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT  
touch the shaded parts shown in the  
illustrations.  
1
• Wait to unpack a new drum unit until  
immediately before you put it in the  
machine. Exposure to direct sunlight or  
room light may damage the drum unit.  
Note  
Be sure to return the blue tab to the home  
position (a) (1). If you do not, printed  
pages may have a vertical stripe.  
• Be sure to seal up the used drum unit  
tightly in a bag so that toner powder does  
not spill out of the unit.  
g Put the new drum unit and toner  
cartridge assembly in the machine.  
Do not close the front cover.  
d Unpack the new drum unit.  
159  
h Press Clear/Back.  
Replacing periodic  
maintenance parts  
Replace Drum?  
C
a
b
1.Yes  
2.No  
Select ab or OK  
The periodic maintenance parts will need to  
be replaced regularly to maintain the print  
quality. The parts listed below will have to be  
replaced after printing approximately 50,000  
pages for PF KitMP and 100,000 pages for  
PF Kit1, PF Kit2, Fuser and Laser. When the  
following messages appear on the LCD  
please call Brother Customer Service:  
To confirm you are installing a new  
drum, press 1.  
i When the LCD shows Accepted, close  
the front cover.  
(in USA) 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437)  
(in Canada) 1-877-BROTHER  
C
LCD message  
Description  
Replace Parts Replace paper feeding kit for  
MP tray.  
PF Kit MP  
Replace Parts Replace paper feeding kit for  
Tray 1.  
PF Kit 1  
Replace Parts Replace paper feeding kit for  
Tray 2.  
PF Kit 2  
Replace Parts Replace fuser unit.  
Fuser Unit  
Replace Parts Replace laser unit.  
Laser Unit  
160  
 
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
Checking the remaining life of  
parts  
Machine Information  
C
C
Checking the Serial Number  
C
You can see the remaining life of the  
machine's drum unit and periodic  
maintenance parts on the LCD.  
You can see the machine’s Serial Number on  
the LCD.  
C
a Press Menu, 8, 3.  
a Press Menu, 8, 1.  
83.Parts Life  
1.Drum  
81.Serial No.  
2.Fuser  
3.Laser  
Select ab or OK  
XXXXXXXXX  
b Press a or b to choose 1.Drum,  
2.Fuser, 3.Laser, 4.PF Kit MP,  
b Press Stop/Exit.  
5.PF Kit 1or 6.PF Kit 2 .  
Press OK.  
Checking the Page Counters  
C
83.Parts Life  
1.Drum  
You can see the machine’s Page Counters  
for copies, printed pages, reports and lists,  
faxes or a summary total.  
Remaining: XX%  
a Press Menu, 8, 2.  
1
PF Kit 2appears only when the optional  
82.Page Counter  
LT-5300 tray is installed.  
a
b
Total  
Fax/List :XXXXXX  
:XXXXXX  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
The life check will be accurate only if you  
have reset the drum counter when you  
installed a new drum unit. It will not be  
accurate if that part’s life counter was  
reset during the life of the used part.  
b Press a or b to see Total, Fax/List,  
Copyor Print.  
82.Page Counter  
a
b
Copy  
Print  
:XXXXXX  
:XXXXXX  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
161  
           
Reset  
C
How to reset  
C
The following reset functions are available:  
a (USA) Press Menu, 0, 6.  
(Canada) Press Menu, 0, 7.  
1 Network  
You can reset the print server back to its  
default factory settings such as the  
password and IP address infromation.  
06.Reset  
1.Network  
2.Address & Fax  
3.All Settings  
Select ab or OK  
2 Address & Fax  
Address & Fax resets the following  
settings:  
b Press a or b to choose the reset you  
want.  
Press OK.  
Address Book  
(One-Touch Dial, Speed-Dial and  
Setup Groups)  
c Press a or b to choose 1.Resetor  
2.Exit.  
Press OK.  
Programmed fax jobs in the memory  
(Polled TX, Delayed Fax and Delayed  
Batch)  
d If you choose 1.Resetin step c, you  
will be asked to reboot the machine.  
Press a or b to choose 1.Yesor 2.No.  
Press OK.  
Station ID  
(Name and Number)  
Coverpage Msg  
(Comments)  
If you choose 1.Yes, the machine will  
begin the Restart.  
Note  
Remote Fax Option  
You can also reset the Nerwork settings by  
pressng Menu, 7, 0.  
(Remote Access Code, Fax Storage,  
Fax Forwarding, Paging and PC-Fax)  
Report settings  
(Transmission Verification Report, Tel  
Index List and Fax Journal)  
Setting Lock Password  
3 All Settings  
You can reset all the machine settings  
back to the settings that were set at the  
factory.  
Brother strongly recommends you use this  
operation when you dispose of the  
machine.  
Note  
Unplug the interface cable before you choose  
Networkor All Settings.  
162  
     
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
f Take out the drum unit and toner  
cartridge assembly. Leave the toner  
cartridge installed in the drum unit.  
Packing and shipping  
the machine  
C
g Put the drum unit and toner cartridge  
assembly into a plastic bag and seal the  
bag.  
CAUTION  
C
If you pack the machine soon after turning  
off the power make sure the machine has  
cooled down completely.  
h Close the front cover.  
i Put the styrofoam piece marked  
“FRONT” into the original carton (1).  
Pack the drum unit and toner cartridge  
assembly (2) and put it in as shown  
below (3). Wrap the machine in the  
plastic bag and put it in the original  
carton (4). Put the printed material  
behind the machine (5).  
When you transport the machine, use the  
packing materials that came with your  
machine. If you do not pack the machine  
properly, you could void your warranty. The  
machine should be adequately insured with  
the carrier.  
a Turn off the machine’s power switch.  
b Unplug the machine from the telephone  
wall jack.  
c Unplug all the cables and AC power  
cord from the machine.  
d Push the Scanner Lock Lever down to  
lock the scanner. This lever is located on  
the left of the scanner glass.  
IMPORTANT  
Damage caused to your machine by  
failure to lock the scanner before packing  
and shipping may void your warranty.  
e Press the front cover release button and  
open the front cover.  
163  
 
j Put the two styrofoam pieces into the  
carton matching the front of the machine  
to the “FRONT” mark on one of the  
styrofoam pieces, and the back of the  
machine to the “REAR” mark on the  
other styrofoam pieces (6). Put the AC  
power cord and printed materials in the  
original carton as shown below (7).  
Note  
If you are returning your machine to  
Brother as part of the Exchange Service,  
pack only the machine. Keep all separate  
parts, including the drum unit and toner  
cartridge assembly, and printed materials  
to use with your ‘Exchange’ machine.  
k Close the carton and tape it shut.  
164  
Menu and features  
D
D
On-screen  
programming  
Menu keys  
D
D
Your machine has been designed to be easy  
to use. The LCD provides on-screen  
programming using the menu keys.  
D
We have created step by step on-screen  
instructions to help you program your  
machine. Simply follow the steps as they  
guide you through the menu selections and  
programming options.  
Access the menu.  
Menu table  
D
Go to the next menu level.  
Accept an option.  
You can program your machine by using the  
Menu table on page 167. These pages list  
the menu selections and options.  
Exit the menu by pressing  
repeatedly.  
Press Menu followed by the menu numbers  
to program your machine.  
Go back to the previous  
menu level.  
For example, to set Beepervolume to Low:  
a Press Menu, 1, 3, 2.  
Scroll through the current  
menu level.  
b Press a or b to choose Low.  
c Press OK.  
Go back to the previous  
menu level or forward to the  
next menu level.  
Memory storage  
D
Exit the menu.  
Your menu settings are stored permanently,  
and in the event of a power failure will not be  
lost. Temporary settings (for example,  
Contrast, Overseas Mode) will be lost. Also,  
during a power failure the machine will retain  
the date and time and any fax messages that  
are in the memory for approximately 60  
hours.  
165  
         
How to access the menu  
mode  
D
a Press Menu.  
b Choose an option.  
Press 1 for General Setup menu.  
Press 2 for Fax menu.  
Press 3 for Copy menu.  
Press 4 for Printer menu.  
Press 5 for USB Direct I/F menu.  
Press 6 for Print Reports menu.  
Press 7 for Network menu.  
Press 8 for Machine Info. menu.  
Press 9 for Service menu.  
Press 0 for Initial Setup.  
1
This will appear only when the LCD shows an  
error message.  
You can also scroll through each menu  
level by pressing a or b for the direction  
you want.  
c Press OK when the option you want  
appears on the LCD.  
The LCD will then show the next menu  
level.  
d Press a or b to scroll to your next menu  
selection.  
e Press OK.  
When you have finished setting an  
option, the LCD will show Accepted.  
f Press Stop/Exit to exit Menu mode.  
166  
   
Menu and features  
Menu table  
D
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
Choose & OK  
Choose & OK  
to accept  
to exit  
D
Main Menu  
Submenu  
Menu Selections  
Options  
0 Sec  
Descriptions  
Page  
1.General Setup 1.Mode Timer  
Sets the time to  
33  
return to Fax mode  
and the time the  
machine will change  
from individual user  
to Public mode when  
using Secure  
30 Secs  
1 Min  
2 Mins*  
5 Mins  
Function Lock.  
Off  
2.Paper  
1.Paper Type 1.MP Tray  
Thin  
Sets the type of  
paper in the MP tray.  
23  
23  
23  
Plain*  
Thick  
Thicker  
Transparency  
Recycled Paper  
Thin  
2.Tray#1  
Sets the type of  
paper in the paper  
tray.  
Plain*  
Thick  
Thicker  
Transparency  
Recycled Paper  
Thin  
3.Tray#2  
Sets the type of  
paper in the optional  
paper tray #2.  
(This menu  
only appears if  
you have the  
optional  
Plain*  
Thick  
Thicker  
Recycled Paper  
tray #2.)  
167  
   
Main Menu  
Submenu  
Menu Selections  
Options  
A4  
Descriptions  
Page  
1.General Setup 2.Paper  
2.Paper Size 1.MP Tray  
Sets the size of the  
paper in the MP tray.  
24  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
Letter*  
Legal  
Executive  
A5  
A5 L  
A6  
B5  
B6  
Folio  
Any  
2.Tray#1  
A4  
Sets the size of the  
paper in the paper  
tray.  
24  
Letter*  
Legal  
Executive  
A5  
A5 L  
A6  
B5  
B6  
Folio  
A4  
3.Tray#2  
Sets the size of the  
paper in the optional  
paper tray #2.  
24  
(This menu  
only appears if  
you have the  
optional  
Letter*  
Legal  
Executive  
A5  
tray #2.)  
B5  
B6  
Folio  
Off  
3.Volume  
1.Ring  
Adjusts the ring  
volume.  
26  
Low  
Med*  
High  
168  
Menu and features  
Main Menu  
Submenu  
Menu Selections  
Options  
Off  
Descriptions  
Page  
1.General Setup 3.Volume  
2.Beeper  
Adjusts the volume  
level of the beeper.  
26  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
Low  
Med*  
High  
Off  
3.Speaker  
Adjusts the speaker  
volume.  
26  
Low  
D
Med*  
High  
On  
4.Auto Daylight  
5.Ecology  
Changes for Daylight  
Savings Time  
automatically.  
27  
27  
Off*  
1.Toner Save  
On  
Increases the page  
yield of the toner  
cartridge.  
Off*  
2.Sleep Time  
1.Copy  
(000-240)  
005Min*  
Conserves power.  
28  
24  
6.Tray Use  
Tray#1 Only  
Tray#2 Only  
MP Only  
Selects the tray that  
will be used for Copy  
mode.  
MP>T1>T2*  
T1>T2>MP  
(Tray#2 or T2  
appears only if  
you installed the  
optional paper  
tray.)  
2.Fax  
Tray#1 Only  
Tray#2 Only  
MP Only  
Selects the tray that  
will be used for Fax  
mode.  
25  
MP>T1>T2  
T1>T2>MP*  
(Tray#2 or T2  
appears only if  
you installed the  
optional paper  
tray.)  
169  
Main Menu  
Submenu  
Menu Selections  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
1.General Setup 6.Tray Use  
3.Print  
Tray#1 Only  
Tray#2 Only  
MP Only  
Selects the tray that  
will be used for PC  
print.  
25  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
MP>T1>T2*  
T1>T2>MP  
(Tray#2 or T2  
appears only if  
you installed the  
optional paper  
tray.)  
7.LCD Contrast  
Adjusts the contrast  
of the LCD.  
28  
30  
-nnnno+  
-nnnon+  
-nnonn+*  
-nonnn+  
-onnnn+  
8.Security  
1.Function Lock  
2.Setting Lock  
Can restrict selected  
machine operation  
for up to 25 individual  
users and all other  
non-authorized  
Public users.  
Stops unauthorized  
users from changing  
the machine’s  
34  
40  
current settings.  
9.Document Scan 1.Glass ScanSize  
2.File size 1.Color  
2.Gray  
A4  
Adjusts the scan  
area of the scanner  
glass to the size of  
the document.  
Letter*  
Legal/Folio  
Large  
You can set your own  
default settings of the  
data compression  
rate.  
See  
Software  
User’s  
Guide on  
the  
Middle*  
Small  
Large  
CD-ROM.  
Middle*  
Small  
3.Duplex Scan  
Long edge*  
Short edge  
Chooses the duplex  
scanning format.  
38  
(MFC-8890DW)  
170  
Menu and features  
Main Menu  
Submenu  
Menu Selections Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
2.Fax  
1.Setup Receive  
(In Fax mode only)  
1.Ring Delay  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04*  
Sets the number of  
rings before the  
machine answers in  
Fax Only or Fax/Tel  
mode.  
50  
2.F/T Ring Time 20Secs*  
Sets the  
50  
pseudo/double-ring  
time in Fax/Tel mode.  
D
30Secs  
40Secs  
70Secs  
3.Easy Receive On*  
Off  
Receives fax  
messages without  
pressing Start.  
51  
61  
4.Remote Codes On* (l51, #51)  
Allows you to answer  
all calls at an  
Off  
extension or external  
telephone and use  
codes to turn the  
machine on or off.  
You can personalize  
these codes.  
5.Auto Reduction On*  
Cuts the size of  
incoming faxes.  
52  
51  
Off  
6.Print Density  
Makes printouts  
darker or lighter.  
-nnnno+  
-nnnon+  
-nnonn+*  
-nonnn+  
-onnnn+  
7.Polling RX  
Sets up your machine  
to poll another fax  
machine.  
77  
53  
8.Fax Rx Stamp On  
Off*  
Prints the received  
time and date on the  
top of the received  
faxes.  
9.Duplex  
On  
Prints receive faxes  
on both sides of the  
paper.  
52  
44  
Off*  
2.Setup Send  
1.Contrast  
Auto*  
Light  
Dark  
Changes the  
lightness or darkness  
of faxes you send.  
2.Fax Resolution Standard*  
Sets the default  
resolution for  
outgoing faxes.  
44  
Fine  
S.Fine  
Photo  
171  
Main Menu  
2.Fax  
Submenu  
Menu Selections Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
2.Setup Send  
(Continued)  
3.Delayed Fax  
Sets the time of day in  
24 hour format that  
the delayed faxes will  
be sent.  
46  
(Continued)  
4.Batch TX  
On  
Combines delayed  
faxes going to the  
same fax number at  
the same time of day  
into one transmission.  
46  
45  
Off*  
5.Real Time TX Next Fax:On  
Sends a fax without  
using the memory.  
Next Fax:Off  
On  
Off*  
6.Polled TX  
On  
Sets up your machine  
with a document to be  
retrieved by another  
fax machine.  
78  
42  
Off*  
7.Coverpg Setup Next Fax:On  
Automaticallysendsa  
cover page you have  
programmed.  
Next Fax:Off  
On  
Off*  
Print Sample  
8.Coverpage Msg  
Sets up your own  
comments for the fax  
cover page.  
42  
46  
9.Overseas Mode On  
Off*  
If you are having  
difficulty sending  
faxes overseas, set  
this to On.  
3.Address Book  
1.One Touch Dial  
2.Speed Dial  
3.Setup Groups  
Stores up to 40 One  
Touch Dial numbers,  
so you can dial by  
pressing one key  
(and Start).  
64  
65  
Stores up to 300  
Speed Dial numbers,  
so you can dial by  
pressing only a few  
keys (and Start).  
Sets up to 20 Group  
numbers for  
Broadcasting.  
67  
79  
4.Report Setting  
1.Transmission On  
On+Image  
Sets initial setup for  
Transmission  
Verification Report.  
Off*  
Off+Image  
172  
Menu and features  
Main Menu  
2.Fax  
Submenu  
Menu Selections Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
4.Report Setting  
(Continued)  
2.Journal Period Off  
Sets the interval for  
automatic printing of  
the Fax Journal.  
80  
(Continued)  
Every 50 Faxes*  
Every 6 Hours  
Every 12 Hours  
Every 24 Hours  
Every 2 Days  
Every 7 Days  
D
5.Remote Fax Opt  
1.Fwd/Page/Store Off*  
Sets the machine to  
forward fax  
70  
Fax Forward  
Paging  
messages, to call  
your pager, to store  
incoming faxes in the  
memory (so you can  
retrieve them while  
you are away from  
your machine), or to  
send faxes to your  
PC.  
Fax Storage  
PC Fax Receive  
(Backup Print)  
If you choose  
Fax Forward or PC  
Fax Receive, you can  
turn on the safety  
feature Backup Print.  
2.Remote Access ---l  
Sets your own code  
for Remote Retrieval.  
74  
53  
36  
3.Print Fax  
1.Dial Pad  
Prints incoming faxes  
stored in the memory.  
6.Dial Restrict.  
Off*  
You can set the  
machine to restrict  
dialing when using  
the dial pad.  
Enter # twice  
On  
2.One Touch Dial Off*  
Enter # twice  
You can set the  
machine to restrict  
the dialing of  
36  
36  
36  
46  
On  
One Touch numbers.  
3.Speed Dial  
Off*  
You can set the  
machine to restrict  
the dialing of Speed  
Dial numbers.  
Enter # twice  
On  
4.LDAP Server Off*  
You can set the  
machine to restrict  
the dialing of LDAP  
Server numbers.  
(MFC-8890DW)  
Enter # twice  
On  
7.Remaining Jobs  
You can check which  
jobs are in the  
memory and lets you  
cancel scheduled  
jobs.  
173  
Main Menu  
2.Fax  
Submenu  
Menu Selections Options  
1.Compatibility High*  
Normal  
Descriptions  
Page  
0.Miscellaneous  
Adjusts the  
equalization for  
transmission  
133  
(Continued)  
Basic(for VoIP) difficulties.  
VoIP service  
providers offer fax  
support using various  
standards. If you  
regularly experience  
fax transmission  
errors, choose  
Basic(for VoIP).  
2.Distinctive Off*  
Uses the telephone  
company’sDistinctive  
Ring subscriber  
service to register the  
ring pattern with the  
machine.  
54  
84  
Set  
3.Copy  
1.Quality  
Text  
You can choose the  
Copy resolution for  
your type of  
Photo  
Auto*  
document.  
2.FB Txt Quality  
3.Brightness  
1200x600dpi  
600dpi*  
84  
85  
Adjust the brightness  
for copies.  
-nnnno+  
-nnnon+  
-nnonn+*  
-nonnn+  
-onnnn+  
4.Contrast  
Adjusts the contrast  
for copies.  
85  
-nnnno+  
-nnnon+  
-nnonn+*  
-nonnn+  
-onnnn+  
You can change to  
the higher Copy  
resolution when you  
make a text copy with  
100% ratio using the  
scanner glass.  
174  
Menu and features  
Main Menu  
Submenu  
Menu Selections Options  
Auto(EPSON)*  
Descriptions  
Page  
4.Printer  
1.Emulation  
Chooses the  
emulation mode.  
See  
Software  
User’s  
Auto(IBM)  
HP LaserJet  
BR-Script 3  
Epson FX-850  
IBM Proprinter  
Guide on  
the  
CD-ROM.  
D
2.Print Options  
1.Internal Font 1.HP LaserJet  
Prints a list of the  
machine’s internal  
fonts.  
2.BR-Script 3  
2.Configuration  
Prints a list of the  
machine’s printer  
settings.  
3.Test Print  
Prints a test page.  
3.Duplex  
Off*  
Enables or disables  
duplex printing. You  
can also choose long  
edge or short edge  
duplex printing.  
On(Long Edge)  
On(Short Edge)  
4.Reset Printer  
1.Reset  
2.Exit  
Restores the printer  
settings to the original  
factory default  
settings.  
5.USB Direct I/F 1.Direct Print  
1.Paper Size  
A4  
Sets the paper size  
when printing directly  
from the USB flash  
memory drive.  
93  
Letter*  
Legal  
Executive  
A5  
A5 L and A6 size are  
not available for the  
optional Tray #2.  
A5 L  
A6  
B5  
B6  
Folio  
Thin  
2.Media Type  
Sets the media type  
when printing directly  
from the USB flash  
memory drive.  
93  
Plain*  
Thick  
Thicker  
Recycled Paper  
175  
Main Menu  
Submenu  
Menu Selections Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
5.USB Direct I/F 1.Direct Print  
3.Multiple Page 1in1*  
Sets the page style  
when printing multiple  
pages directly from  
the USB Flash  
93  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
2in1  
4in1  
memory drive.  
9in1  
16in1  
25in1  
1 in 2x2 pages  
1 in 3x3 pages  
1 in 4x4 pages  
1 in 5x5 pages  
4.Orientation Portrait*  
Sets the page  
93  
93  
orientation when  
printing directly from  
the USB Flash  
memory drive.  
Landscape  
5.Collate  
On*  
Enables or disables  
the page collation  
when printing directly  
from the USB Flash  
memory drive.  
Off  
6.Print Quality Normal*  
Sets the print quality  
option when printing  
directly from the USB  
Flash memory drive.  
93  
93  
Fine  
7.PDF Option  
Document*  
Sets the PDF option  
whether to print  
comments (Markup)  
Document&Markup  
Document&Stamps or stamps in the PDF  
file along with the text.  
8.Index Print Simple*  
Sets the index print  
option, simple format  
or details.  
93  
Details  
2.Scan to USB  
1.Resolution  
Color 100 dpi*  
Sets the resolution to  
send the scanned  
data to USB Flash  
memory drive.  
See  
Software  
User’s  
Guide on  
the  
Color 200 dpi  
Color 300 dpi  
Color 600 dpi  
Gray 100 dpi  
Gray 200 dpi  
Gray 300 dpi  
B&W 200 dpi  
B&W 200x100 dpi  
CD-ROM.  
2.File Name  
Enter the file name of  
the scanned data.  
176  
Menu and features  
Main Menu  
Submenu  
Menu Selections Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
6.Print Reports 1.Transmission  
1.View on LCD  
You can view the  
Transmission  
80  
Verification Report for  
your last 200  
2.Print Report  
outgoing faxes and  
print the last report.  
2.Help List  
Prints the Help List so  
you can see at-a-  
glance how to quickly  
program your  
80  
80  
D
machine.  
3.Tel Index List  
1.Numeric  
Lists name and  
numbers stored in the  
One-Touch and  
2.Alphabetic  
Speed-Dial memory,  
in numerical or  
alphabetical order.  
4.Fax Journal  
Lists information  
about your last 200  
incoming and  
80  
outgoing faxes. (TX  
means Transmit. RX  
means Receive.)  
5.User Settings  
6.Network Config  
Lists your settings.  
80  
Lists your Network  
settings.  
177  
Main  
Submenu  
Menu Selections  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
Menu  
7.Network 1.TCP/IP  
(MFC-8480DN)  
1.Boot Method  
Auto*  
Static  
RARP  
Chooses the BOOT  
method that best  
suits your needs.  
See  
Network  
User’s  
Guide on  
the  
BOOTP  
DHCP  
CD-ROM.  
2.IP Address  
3.Subnet Mask  
4.Gateway  
[000-255]. [000-255]. Enter the IP address.  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
[000-255]. [000-255]. Enter the Subnet  
[000-255]. [000-255] mask.  
[000-255]. [000-255]. Enter the Gateway  
[000-255]. [000-255] address.  
5.Node Name  
6.WINS Config  
BRNXXXXXXXXXXXX Enter the Node  
name.  
Auto*  
Chooses the WINS  
configuration mode.  
Static  
(Primary)  
7.WINS Server  
8.DNS Server  
9.APIPA  
Specifies the IP  
address of the  
primary or secondary  
WINS server.  
[000-255]. [000-255].  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
(Secondary)  
[000-255]. [000-255].  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
(Primary)  
Specifies the IP  
address of the  
primary or secondary  
DNS server.  
[000-255]. [000-255].  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
(Secondary)  
[000-255]. [000-255].  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
On*  
Automatically  
allocates the IP  
address from the  
link-local address  
range.  
Off  
178  
Menu and features  
Main  
Submenu  
Menu Selections  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
Menu  
7.Network 1.TCP/IP  
(MFC-8480DN) (Continued)  
(Continued)  
0.IPv6  
On  
EnableorDisablethe  
IPv6 protocol. If you  
want to use the IPv6  
protocol, visit  
for more information.  
See  
Network  
User’s  
Guide on  
the  
Off*  
CD-ROM.  
2.Ethernet  
Auto*  
Chooses the  
Ethernet link mode.  
D
100B-FD  
100B-HD  
10B-FD  
10B-HD  
3.Scan To FTP  
Color 100 dpi*  
Color 200 dpi  
Color 300 dpi  
Color 600 dpi  
Gray 100 dpi  
Gray 200 dpi  
Gray 300 dpi  
B&W 200 dpi  
B&W 200x100 dpi  
Color 100 dpi*  
Color 200 dpi  
Color 300 dpi  
Color 600 dpi  
Gray 100 dpi  
Gray 200 dpi  
Gray 300 dpi  
B&W 200 dpi  
B&W 200x100 dpi  
UTC XXX:XX  
Chooses the file  
format to send the  
scanned data via  
FTP.  
4.ScanTo Network  
You can scan a black  
and white or color  
document directly to  
a CIFS server on  
your local network or  
on the internet.  
5.Time Zone  
Sets the time zone  
for your country.  
0.Network Reset 1.Reset  
1.Yes  
2.No  
Restore all network  
settings to factory  
default.  
2.Exit  
179  
Main  
Submenu  
Menu Selections  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
Menu  
7.Network 1.Wired LAN 1.TCP/IP  
1.BOOT Method Auto*  
Chooses the BOOT  
method that best  
suits your needs.  
See  
Network  
User’s  
Guide on  
the  
(MFC-8890DW)  
Static  
RARP  
BOOTP  
DHCP  
CD-ROM.  
2.IP Address [000-255]. [000-255]. Enter the IP address.  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
3.Subnet Mask [000-255]. [000-255]. Enter the Subnet  
[000-255]. [000-255] mask.  
4.Gateway  
[000-255]. [000-255]. Enter the Gateway  
[000-255]. [000-255] address.  
5.Node Name BRNXXXXXXXXXXXX Enter the Node  
name.  
6.WINS Config Auto*  
Static  
Chooses the WINS  
configuration mode.  
7.WINS Server (Primary)  
Specifies the IP  
address of the  
primary or secondary  
WINS server.  
[000-255]. [000-255].  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
(Secondary)  
[000-255]. [000-255].  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
8.DNS Server (Primary)  
Specifies the IP  
address of the  
primary or secondary  
DNS server.  
[000-255]. [000-255].  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
(Secondary)  
[000-255]. [000-255].  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
9.APIPA  
0.IPv6  
On*  
Automatically  
allocates the IP  
address from the  
link-local address  
range.  
Off  
On  
EnableorDisablethe  
IPv6 protocol. If you  
want to use the IPv6  
protocol, visit  
Off*  
for more information.  
180  
Menu and features  
Main  
Submenu  
Menu Selections  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
Menu  
7.Network 1.Wired LAN 2.Ethernet  
(MFC-8890DW ) (Continued)  
(Continued)  
Auto*  
Chooses the  
Ethernet link mode.  
See  
Network  
User’s  
Guide on  
the  
100B-FD  
100B-HD  
10B-FD  
10B-HD  
1.Reset  
2.Exit  
CD-ROM.  
3.Set to Default  
4.Wired Enable  
Restore the wired  
network setting to  
factory default.  
D
On*  
EnableorDisablethe  
Wired LAN manually.  
Off  
2.WLAN  
1.TCP/IP  
1.BOOT Method Auto*  
Chooses the BOOT  
method that best  
suits your needs.  
Static  
RARP  
BOOTP  
DHCP  
2.IP Address [000-255]. [000-255]. Enter the IP address.  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
3.Subnet Mask [000-255]. [000-255]. Enter the Subnet  
[000-255]. [000-255] mask.  
4.Gateway  
[000-255]. [000-255]. Enter the Gateway  
[000-255]. [000-255] address.  
5.Node Name BRWXXXXXXXXXXXX Enter the Node  
name.  
6.WINS Config Auto*  
Static  
Chooses the WINS  
configuration mode.  
7.WINS Server (Primary)  
Specifies the IP  
address of the  
primary or secondary  
WINS server.  
[000-255]. [000-255].  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
(Secondary)  
[000-255]. [000-255].  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
8.DNS Server (Primary)  
Specifies the IP  
address of the  
primary or secondary  
DNS server.  
[000-255]. [000-255].  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
(Secondary)  
[000-255]. [000-255].  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
181  
Main  
Submenu  
Menu Selections  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
Menu  
7.Network 2.WLAN  
(MFC-8890DW ) (Continued)  
(Continued)  
1.TCP/IP  
9.APIPA  
On*  
Automatically  
allocates the IP  
address from the  
link-local address  
range.  
See  
Network  
User’s  
Guide on  
the  
(Continued)  
Off  
CD-ROM.  
0.IPv6  
On  
EnableorDisablethe  
IPv6 protocol. If you  
want to use the IPv6  
protocol, visit  
Off*  
for more information.  
2.Setup Wizard On  
You can configure  
your print server.  
Off  
3.SES/WPS/AOSS On  
You can easily  
configure your  
wireless network  
settings using the  
one-button push  
method.  
Off  
4.WPS w/PIN Code On  
You can easily  
configure your  
Off  
wireless network  
settings using WPS  
with a PIN code.  
5.WLAN Status 1.Status  
Active(11b)  
Active(11g)  
Wired LAN Active  
WLAN OFF  
AOSS Active  
Connection Fail  
Strong  
You can see the  
current wireless  
network status.  
2.Signal  
3.SSID  
You can see the  
current wireless  
network signal  
strength.  
Medium  
Weak  
None  
You can see the  
current SSID.  
4.Comm. Mode Ad-hoc  
Infrastructure  
You can see the  
current  
Communication  
Mode.  
182  
Menu and features  
Main  
Submenu  
Menu Selections  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
Menu  
7.Network 2.WLAN  
(MFC-8890DW) (Continued)  
(Continued)  
6.Set to Default  
1.Reset  
2.Exit  
Restore the wireless  
network setting to  
factory default.  
See  
Network  
User’s  
Guide on  
the  
7.WLAN Enable  
On  
Enable or disable the  
wireless LAN  
manually.  
Off*  
CD-ROM.  
3.E-mail/IFAX 1.Mail Address  
Enter the mail  
address. (Up to 60  
characters)  
D
2.Setup Server 1.SMTP Server Name?  
Enter the SMTP  
server address.  
(up to 64 characters)  
IP Address?  
[000-255]. [000-255].  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
2.SMTP Port  
[00001-65535]  
Enter the POP3 port  
number.  
3.Auth. for SMTP None*  
Selects the security  
method for E-mail  
notification.  
SMTP-AUTH  
POP bef.SMTP  
4.POP3 Server Name?  
Enter the POP3  
server address.  
(up to 64 characters)  
IP Address?  
[000-255]. [000-255].  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
5.POP3 Port  
6.Mailbox Name  
[00001-65535]  
Enter the POP3 port  
number.  
Enter the mail box  
name. (Up to 60  
characters)  
7.Mailbox Pwd  
8.APOP  
Enter the password  
to login to the POP3  
server. (Up to 32  
characters)  
On  
Enables or disables  
APOP.  
Off*  
3.Setup Mail RX 1.Auto Polling On*  
Automaticallychecks  
the POP3 server for  
new messages.  
Off  
183  
Main  
Submenu  
Menu Selections  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
Menu  
7.Network 3.E-mail/IFAX 3.Setup Mail RX 2.Poll Frequency 10Min*  
Sets the interval for  
checking for new  
messages on the  
POP3 server.  
See  
Network  
User’s  
Guide on  
the  
(MFC-8890DW) (Continued)  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
(01-60)  
3.Header  
All  
Selects the contents  
of the mail header to  
be printed.  
CD-ROM.  
Subject+From+To  
None*  
4.Del Error Mail On*  
Deletes error mails  
automatically.  
Off  
5.Notification On  
Receives notification  
messages.  
MDN  
Off*  
4.Setup Mail TX 1.Sender Subject  
Displays the subject  
that is attached to the  
Internet Fax data.  
2.Size Limit On  
Off*  
Limits the size of  
E-mail documents.  
3.Notification On  
Sends notification  
messages.  
Off*  
5.Setup Relay 1.Rly Broadcast On  
Relays a document  
to another fax  
machine.  
Off*  
2.Relay Domain Relay XX:  
Registers the  
Domain name.  
3.Relay Report On  
Off*  
Prints the Relay  
Broadcast Report.  
4.Scan To E-mail  
Color 100 dpi*  
Chooses the file  
format to send the  
scanned data via e-  
mail.  
Color 200 dpi  
Color 300 dpi  
Color 600 dpi  
Gray 100 dpi  
Gray 200 dpi  
Gray 300 dpi  
B&W 200 dpi  
B&W 200x100 dpi  
184  
Menu and features  
Main  
Menu  
Submenu  
Menu Selections  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
7.Network 5.Scan To FTP  
(MFC-8890DW)  
Color 100 dpi*  
Color 200 dpi  
Color 300 dpi  
Color 600 dpi  
Gray 100 dpi  
Gray 200 dpi  
Gray 300 dpi  
B&W 200 dpi  
B&W 200x100 dpi  
Color 100 dpi*  
Color 200 dpi  
Color 300 dpi  
Color 600 dpi  
Gray 100 dpi  
Gray 200 dpi  
Gray 300 dpi  
B&W 200 dpi  
B&W 200x100 dpi  
On  
Chooses the file  
format to send the  
scanned data via  
FTP.  
See  
Network  
User’s  
Guide on  
the  
(Continued)  
CD-ROM.  
D
6.ScanTo Network  
You can scan a balck  
and white or color  
document directly to  
a CIFS server on  
your local network or  
on the internet.  
7.Fax to Server  
You can store a  
prefix/suffix address  
in the machine and  
cansendadocument  
from a fax server  
system.  
Off*  
8.Time Zone  
UTC XXX:XX  
Sets the time zone  
for your country.  
0.Network Reset 1.Reset  
1.Yes  
2.No  
Restores all network  
settings to factory  
default.  
2.Exit  
185  
Main Menu  
Submenu  
Menu Selections Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
8.Machine Info. 1.Serial No.  
You can check the  
serial number of your  
machine.  
161  
2.Page Counter  
Total  
Fax/List  
Copy  
You can check the  
number of total  
pages the machine  
has printed during its  
life.  
161  
161  
Print  
3.Parts Life  
1.Drum  
You can check the  
percentage of a  
machine part’s life  
that remains  
2.Fuser  
3.Laser  
available.  
4.PF Kit MP  
5.PF Kit 1  
6.PF Kit 2  
PF Kit 2appears  
only when the  
optional LT5300 tray  
is installed.  
0.Initial Setup 1.Receive Mode  
Fax Only*  
Fax/Tel  
External TAD  
Manual  
Chooses the receive  
mode that best suits  
your needs.  
48  
2.Date&Time  
3.Station ID  
Puts the date and  
time on the LCD and Quick  
in headings of faxes  
you send.  
See  
Setup  
Guide.  
Fax:  
Sets your name and  
fax number to appear  
on each page you  
fax.  
Tel:  
Name:  
4.Tone/Pulse  
(in Canada)  
Tone*  
Chooses the dialing  
mode.  
Pulse  
4.Dial Tone  
(in USA)  
Detection  
No Detection*  
You can shorten the  
dial tone detect  
pause.  
133  
29  
5.Dial Tone  
(in Canada)  
5.Dial Prefix  
(in USA)  
Sets a prefix number  
that will always be  
added before the fax  
number every time  
you dial.  
6.Dial Prefix  
(in Canada)  
186  
Menu and features  
Main Menu  
Submenu  
Menu Selections Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
0.Initial Setup 6.Reset  
1.Network  
1. Reset  
2. Exit  
You can reset the  
print server back to  
its default factory  
settings, such as the  
password and IP  
162  
(Continued)  
(in USA)  
7.Reset  
(in Canada)  
address information  
2.Address & Fax 1. Reset  
Restores all stored  
phone number and  
fax settings.  
162  
162  
2. Exit  
D
3.All Settings 1. Reset  
Restores all the  
machine settings to  
the factory default  
settings.  
2. Exit  
0.Local Language  
(Choose your  
language.)  
Allows you to change  
the LCD language for Quick  
See  
your country.  
Setup  
Guide.  
187  
Entering text  
D
When setting certain menu selections, such as the Station ID, you will need to type text  
characters. The dial pad keys have letters printed on them. The keys: 0, # and ldo not have  
printed letters because they are used for special characters.  
Press the appropriate dial pad key the number of times shown in this reference table to access  
the character you want.  
Press  
Key  
one  
time  
two  
times  
three  
times  
four  
times  
five  
times  
six  
times  
seven  
times  
eight  
times  
nine  
times  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
@
a
d
g
j
.
/
c
f
1
A
D
G
J
@
B
.
/
1
a
d
g
j
@
b
e
h
k
b
e
h
k
n
q
u
x
C
F
I
2
3
4
5
6
R
8
Y
E
i
H
K
l
L
m
p
t
o
r
M
s
N
P
O
Q
V
X
m
S
t
n
7
u
9
v
y
T
z
U
W
w
Z
For menu selections that do not allow lower case character selection, please use this reference  
table.  
Press Key  
one time  
two times three times four times  
five times  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
D
G
J
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
C
F
I
2
3
4
5
6
S
8
Z
A
D
G
J
L
M
P
T
O
R
V
Y
M
7
T
9
W
Inserting spaces  
To enter a space in a fax number, press c once between numbers. To enter a space in a name,  
press c twice between characters.  
Making corrections  
If you entered a letter incorrectly and want to change it, press d to move the cursor to the incorrect  
character, and then press Clear/Back.  
Repeating letters  
To enter a character on the same key as the previous character, press c to move the cursor right  
before pressing the key again.  
188  
 
Menu and features  
Special characters and symbols  
Press l, # or 0, then press d or c to move the cursor to the symbol or character you want. Press  
OK to choose it. The symbols and characters below will appear depending on your menu  
selection.  
Press l  
Press #  
Press 0  
for  
for  
for  
(space) ! " # $ % & ’ ( ) l + , - . / m  
: ; < = > ? @ [ ] ^ _ \ ~ ‘ | { }  
(For Wired model)  
Á À Ã Â Ç É È Ê Ë Í Î Ï Ó Õ Ô Ö Œ Ú Ù Û 0  
(For Wireless model)  
D
Á À Ã Â Ç É È Ê Ë Í Î Ï Ó Õ Ô Ö Œ Ú Ù Û 0 \ { | } ~  
189  
Specifications  
E
E
General  
E
Printer Type  
Laser  
Print Method  
Electrophotography by semiconductor laser beam scanning  
64 MB  
Memory Capacity  
LCD (liquid crystal display) 22 characters × 5 lines  
Power Source  
110-120 V AC 50/60 Hz  
Peak:  
Power Consumption  
1080 W  
Copying:  
Average 680 W  
Sleep:  
(MFC-8480DN) Average 18 W  
(MFC-8890DW) Average 19 W  
Average 85 W  
Standby:  
1
When making a copy from one sheet  
Dimensions  
18.7 in.  
(475 mm)  
20.9 in.  
(531 mm)  
17.8 in.  
(451 mm)  
Weight  
With Drum/Toner Unit:  
40.3lb (18.3kg) (MFC-8480DN)  
41.0lb (18.6kg) (MFC-8890DW)  
Noise level  
Sound power  
Operating (Copying):  
Standby:  
LWAd = 6.95 Bell  
LWAd = 4.6 Bell  
Sound pressure  
Operating (Copying):  
Standby:  
LPAm = 56 dBA  
LPAm = 30 dBA  
190  
     
Specifications  
Temperature  
Humidity  
Operating:  
Storage:  
50° F to 90.5° F (10 to 32.5° C)  
41° F to 95° F (5 to 35° C)  
Operating:  
Storage:  
20 to 80% (without condensation)  
10 to 90% (without condensation)  
2
ADF (automatic document  
feeder)  
Up to 50 pages (Staggered) 20 lb (80 g/m )  
Recommended Environment for Best Results:  
Temperature: 68° F to 86° F (20 to 30° C)  
Humidity:  
Paper:  
50% - 70%  
E
Xerox 4200 (20 lb/Letter)  
2
Paper Tray  
250 Sheets 20 lb (80 g/m )  
2
Paper Tray 2 (option)  
250 Sheets 20 lb (80 g/m )  
191  
Print media  
E
Paper Input  
Paper Tray  
Paper Type:  
Thin Paper, Plain Paper, Bond Paper,  
Transparencies or Recycled Paper  
Paper Size:  
Letter, A4, B5(ISO), A5, A5(Long Edge),  
B6(ISO), A6, Executive, Legal and Folio  
Paper Weight:  
16 to 28 lb (60 to 105 g/m2)  
2
Maximum Paper Tray  
Up to 250 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m )  
Plain Paper  
Capacity:  
Multi-purpose tray (MP tray)  
Paper Type:  
Thin Paper, Plain Paper, Thick Paper,  
Bond Paper, Transparencies, Recycled  
Paper, Envelopes or Labels  
Paper Size:  
Width: 2.75 to 8.50 in. (69.8 to 216 mm)  
Length: 4.57 to 16 in. (116.0 to 406.4 mm)  
2
Paper Weight:  
16 to 43 lb (60 to 163 g/m )  
2
Maximum Multi-purpose tray  
Up to 50 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m )  
Plain Paper  
Capacity:  
Up to 3 envelopes  
1
For transparencies and labels, we recommend removing printed pages from the output paper tray immediately after  
they exit the machine to avoid the possibility of smudging.  
Paper Tray 2 (option)  
Paper Type:  
Thin Paper, Plain Paper, Bond Paper or  
Recycled Paper  
Paper Size:  
Letter, A4, B5 (ISO), A5, B6 (ISO),  
Executive, Legal and Folio  
Paper Weight:  
16 to 28 lb (60 to 105 g/m2)  
2
Maximum paper tray capacity:  
Up to 250 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m )  
Plain Paper  
192  
     
Specifications  
Paper Output Output Tray  
Back Output Tray  
Up to 150 sheets (face-down print delivery  
to the output paper tray)  
One sheet (face-up print delivery to the  
back output tray)  
Duplex  
Paper Size  
Letter, Legal and Folio  
Printing  
Manual Duplex  
Yes  
Yes  
Automatic Duplex  
E
193  
Fax  
E
Compatibility  
ITU-T Super Group 3  
Yes  
Duplex Fax (Receive)  
Coding System  
MH/MR/MMR/JBIG  
Automatic Fallback:  
ADF Width:  
Modem Speed  
33,600 bps  
Single-Sided Document Size  
5.8 to 8.5 in. (148 to 215.9 mm)  
5.8 to 14 in. (148 to 355.6 mm)  
ADF Height:  
Scanner Glass Width: Max. 8.5 in. (215.9 mm)  
Scanner Glass Height: Max. 14 in. (355.6 mm)  
2-Sided (Duplex) Document  
Size (MFC-8890DW)  
ADF Width:  
5.8 to 8.5 in. (148 to 215.9 mm)  
5.8 to 11.7 in. (148 to 297.0 mm)  
ADF Height:  
Scanning Width  
Printing Width  
Gray Scale  
Max. 8.2 in. (208 mm)  
Max. 8.2 in. (208 mm)  
8 bit levels  
Polling Types  
Contrast Control  
Resolution  
Standard, Sequential  
Automatic/Light/Dark (manual setting)  
Horizontal:  
Vertical  
203 dot/inch (8 dot/mm)  
Standard:  
Fine:  
98 line/in. (3.85 line/mm)  
196 line/in. (7.7 line/mm)  
196 line/in. (7.7 line/mm)  
392 line/in. (15.4 line/mm)  
Photo:  
Superfine:  
40 (20 × 2)  
300 stations  
Up to 20  
One Touch Dial  
Speed Dial  
Groups  
Broadcasting  
390 stations  
Automatic Redial  
Ring Delay  
Yes,1 time after 5 minutes  
0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 rings  
Communication Source  
Memory Transmission  
Public switched telephone network  
Up to 600 /500 pages  
Out of Paper Reception  
Up to 600 /500 pages  
1
‘Pages’ refers to the ‘Brother No. 1 Chart ’ (a typical business letter, Standard resolution, JBIG code). Specifications  
and printed materials are subject to change without prior notice.  
2
‘Pages’ refers to the ‘ITU-T Test Chart #1’ (a typical business letter, Standard resolution, JBIG code). Specifications  
and printed materials are subject to change without prior notice.  
194  
     
Specifications  
Copy  
E
Copy Speed  
Up to 32 pages/minute (Letter size)  
Copy Speed for Duplex  
Up to 14 sides/minute (Letter size)  
Monochrome  
Color/Monochrome  
Single-sided Document Size ADF Width:  
ADF Length:  
5.8 to 8.5 in. (148 to 215.9 mm)  
5.8 to 14 in. (148 to 355.6 mm)  
Scanner Glass Width: Max. 8.5 in. (215.9 mm)  
Scanner Glass Height: Max. 14 in. (355.6 mm)  
E
2-Sided (Duplex) Document  
Size (MFC-8890DW)  
ADF Width:  
5.8 to 8.5 in. (148 to 215.9 mm)  
5.8 to 11.7 in. (148 to 297.0 mm)  
ADF Height:  
Copy Width:  
Max. 8.26 in. (210 mm)  
Multiple Copies  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Resolution  
Stacks or Sorts up to 99 pages  
25% to 400% (in increments of 1%)  
Max. 1200 × 600 dpi (print)  
First Copy Out Time  
Less than 10.5 seconds (from Ready state)  
1
2
3
The copy speed may change depending on the type of document you copy.  
1200 × 600 dpi when copying with Text quality, 100% ratio and from scanner glass.  
The first copy out time may vary depending on scanner lamp warm up time.  
195  
         
Scan  
E
Color/Monochrome  
Yes/Yes  
Yes  
Duplex Scanning  
(MFC-8890DW)  
®
TWAIN Compliant  
Yes (Windows 2000 Professional/XP/  
XP Professional x64 Edition/Windows Vista )  
®
®
Mac OS X 10.3.9 or greater  
®
®
WIA Compliant  
Yes (Windows XP/Windows Vista )  
24 bit color  
Color Depth  
Resolution  
Up to 19200 × 19200 dpi (interpolated)  
Up to 600 × 2400 dpi (optical) (From Scanner Glass)  
Up to 600 × 1200 dpi (optical) (From ADF)  
Single-Sided Document  
Size  
ADF Width:  
5.8 to 8.5 in. (148.0 to 215.9 mm)  
ADF Height:  
5.8 to 14 in. (148.0 to 355.6 mm)  
Max. 8.5 in. (215.9 mm)  
Scanner Glass Width:  
Scanner Glass Height:  
ADF Width:  
Max. 14 in. (355.6 mm)  
2-Sided (Duplex)  
Document Size  
(MFC-8890DW only)  
5.8 to 8.5 in. (148.0 to 215.9 mm)  
5.8 to 11.7 in. (148.0 to 297.0 mm)  
ADF Height:  
Scanning Width  
Gray Scale  
Max. 8.35 in. (212 mm)  
8 bit levels  
1
For the latest driver updates, visit http://solutions.brother.com/  
2
Maximum 1200 × 1200 dpi scanning with the WIA driver in Windows® XP/Windows Vista® (resolution up to  
19200 × 19200 dpi can be chosen by using the Brother scanner utility)  
196  
           
Specifications  
Print  
E
®
Emulations  
PCL6, BR-Script3 (PostScript 3), IBM Pro-Printer XL, Epson FX-850  
®
Printer Driver  
Host-Based Driver for Windows 2000 Professional/  
®
XP/XP Professional x64 Edition/Windows Vista /  
®
®
Windows Server 2003 /Windows Server 2003 x64  
®
Edition /Windows Server 2008  
®
E
BR-Script3 (PPD file) for Windows 2000 Professional/  
®
XP/XP Professional x64 Edition/Windows Vista /  
®
®
Windows Server 2003 /Windows Server 2003 x64  
®
Edition /Windows Server 2008  
®
®
Macintosh Printer Driver for Mac OS X 10.3.9 or greater  
®
BR-Script3 (PPD file) for Mac OS X 10.3.9 or greater  
Resolution  
1200 dpi, HQ1200 (2400 × 600 dpi), 600 dpi, 300 dpi  
Print Speed for  
Simplex  
Up to 32 pages/minute (Letter size)  
Print Speed for  
Duplex Printing  
Up to 14 sides/minute (Letter size)  
First Print Out Time  
Less than 8.5 seconds (from Ready state and standard tray)  
1
Print only via network.  
2
For the latest driver updates, visit http://solutions.brother.com/  
3
The print speed may change depending on the type of document you print.  
197  
       
Interfaces  
E
Parallel  
A bi-directional shielded parallel cable that is IEEE 1284 compliant  
and no longer than 6 feet (2.0 m).  
USB  
Use a USB 2.0 interface cable that (type A/B) is no longer than 6 feet  
(2.0 m).  
LAN cable  
Use an Ethernet UTP cable category 5 or greater.  
Wireless LAN  
(MFC-8890DW)  
Your machine supports IEEE 802.11b/g wireless communication with  
your wireless LAN using Infrastructure mode or a wireless Peer-to-  
Peer connection in Ad-hoc mode.  
1
Parallel cable is not supported for Window Vista®, Windows Server® 2003, Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition and  
Windows Server® 2008.  
2
3
Your machine has a Hi-Speed USB 2.0 interface. The machine can also be connected to a computer that has a USB  
1.1 interface.  
Third party USB ports are not supported for Macintosh®.  
198  
       
Specifications  
Direct Print feature  
E
Compatibility  
PDF version 1.7 , JPEG, Exif + JPEG, PRN (created by Brother  
printer driver), TIFF (scanned by all Brother MFC or DCP models),  
®
PostScript 3™ (created by Brother BR-Script 3 printer driver), XPS  
version 1.0.  
1
PDF data that includes a JBIG2 image file, a JPEG2000 image file or transparency files is not supported.  
E
199  
   
Computer requirements  
E
Minimum System Requirements and Supported PC Software Functions  
Computer Platform Processor  
& Operating System Minimum  
Minimum Recommended HardDiskSpace Supported Supported  
RAM  
RAM  
to install  
PC  
Software  
Functions  
PC  
Version  
Speed  
Interface  
For  
For  
Drivers Applications  
®
®
®
®
64 MB  
128 MB  
256 MB 150 MB 310 MB Printing,  
PC Fax  
USB,  
Windows  
Windows Intel Pentium  
Operating 2000  
II or equivalent  
,
10/100  
Base Tx  
(Ethernet),  
Scanning  
System  
Professional  
®
Windows  
XP  
Wireless  
Home®  
,
®
Parallel  
Windows  
XP  
Professional  
®
®
256 MB 512 MB  
512 MB 1 GB  
Windows 64-bit (Intel 64  
XP  
or AMD64)  
Professional  
supported CPU  
x64 Edition  
®
®
Windows  
500 MB 500 MB  
USB,  
Intel Pentium  
4 or equivalent  
Vista  
10/100  
Base Tx  
®
64-bit (Intel 64  
or AMD64)  
(Ethernet),  
supported CPU  
Wireless  
802.11 b/g  
®
®
Windows  
256 MB 512 MB 50 MB N/A  
Printing  
10/100  
Base Tx  
(Ethernet),  
Intel Pentium  
®
Server  
III or equivalent  
2003  
(printonly  
via  
network)  
Wireless  
802.11 b/g  
®
Windows  
64-bit (Intel 64  
or AMD64)  
®
Server  
2003 x64 supported CPU  
Edition  
(printonly  
via  
network)  
®
®
Windows  
512 MB 2 GB  
50 MB N/A  
Intel Pentium  
®
Server  
4 or equivalent  
®
2008  
(printonly  
via  
64-bit (Intel 64  
or AMD64)  
supported CPU  
network)  
200  
 
Specifications  
®
®
Macintosh® Mac OS  
PowerPC  
128 MB 256 MB 80 MB 400 MB Printing,  
USB,  
Operating X 10.3.9 - G4/G5,  
PC Fax send  
Scanning  
,
10/100  
Base Tx  
(Ethernet),  
®
System  
10.4.3  
PowerPC G3  
350MHz  
®
®
512 MB 1 GB  
Wireless  
Mac OS  
PowerPC  
®
X 10.4.4  
or greater  
802.11 b/g  
G4/G5, Intel  
Core™  
Processor  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Internet Explorer® 5.5 or greater.  
For WIA, 1200x1200 resolution. Brother scanner Utility enables to enhance up to 19200 x 19200 dpi.  
Third party USB/Parallel ports are not supported.  
E
PC Fax supports black and white only.  
PaperPort™ 11SE supports Microsoft® SP4 or higher for Windows® 2000 and SP2 or higher for XP.  
Wireless feature is available for MFC-8890DW only.  
For the latest driver updates, visit http://solutions.brother.com.  
All trademarks, brand and product names are property of their respective companies.  
201  
           
Consumable items  
E
Toner Cartridge Life  
Standard Toner Cartridge:  
TN-620:  
Approx. 3,000 pages  
(Letter)  
High-Yield Toner Cartridge:  
TN-650:  
Approx. 8,000 pages  
(Letter)  
Drum Unit  
DR-620:  
Approx. 25,000 pages  
(Letter)  
1
2
Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752.  
Drum yield is approximate, and may vary by type of use.  
202  
     
Specifications  
Ethernet wired network  
E
Network board  
model name  
NC-6800h type2  
LAN  
You can connect your machine to a network for Network Printing,  
Network Scanning, PC Fax and Remote Setup.  
®
®
®
Support for  
Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP, Windows XP  
®
®
Professional x64 Edition, Windows Vista , Windows Server 2003 ,  
®
®
Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition , Windows Server 2008  
E
®
Mac OS X 10.3.9 or greater  
IPv4:  
Protocols  
ARP, RARP, BOOTP, DHCP, APIPA (Auto IP),  
WINS/NetBIOS name resolution, DNS Resolver,  
mDNS, LLMNR responder, LPR/LPD,  
Custom Raw Port/Port9100, IPP/IPPS,  
FTP Client and Server, TELNET Server,  
HTTP/HTTPS Server, SSL/TLS,  
TFTP Client and Server, SMTP Client, APOP,  
POP before SMTP, SMTP AUTH, SNMPv1/v2c/v3,  
ICMP, LLTD responder,  
Web Services Print, CIFS Client, SNTP,  
LDAP (MFC-8890DW),  
POP3/SMTP (MFC-8890DW)  
IPv6:  
(Turned off as default) NDP, RA, DNS resolver,  
mDNS, LLMNR responder, LPR/LPD,  
Custom Raw Port/Port9100, IPP/IPPS,  
FTP Client and Server, TELNET Server,  
HTTP/HTTPS server, SSL/TLS,  
TFTP Client and Server, SMTP Client, APOP,  
POP before SMTP, SMTP AUTH, SNMPv1/v2c/v3,  
ICMPv6, LLTD responder,  
Web Services Print, CIFS Client, SNTP,  
LDAP (MFC-8890DW),  
POP3/SMTP (MFC-8890DW)  
Network type  
Ethernet 10/100 BASE-TX Auto Negotiation (Wired LAN)  
203  
 
®
®
Management  
BRAdmin Light for Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP,  
®
®
utilities  
Windows XP Professional x64 Edition, Windows Vista , Windows  
®
®
®
Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Server  
®
2008 and Mac OS X 10.3.9 or greater  
®
®
BRAdmin Professional for Windows 2000 Professional, Windows  
®
®
XP, Windows XP Professional x64 Edition, Windows Vista ,  
®
®
Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition and  
®
Windows Server 2008  
®
®
Web BRAdmin for Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP,  
®
®
Windows XP Professional x64 Edition, Windows Vista , Windows  
®
®
Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition and Windows  
®
Server 2008  
Client computers with a web browser supporting Java.  
1
2
3
4
5
PC Fax Send for Mac®  
Printing only for Windows Server® 2003 and Windows Server® 2008  
Mac OS® X 10.3.9 or greater (mDNS)  
For the latest driver updates, visit http://solutions.brother.com/  
BRAdmin Professional and Web BRAdmin are available as a download from http://solutions.brother.com/  
204  
         
Specifications  
Ethernet wireless network (MFC-8890DW only)  
E
Network board  
model name  
NC-7600w type2  
LAN  
You can connect your machine to a network for Network Printing,  
Network Scanning, PC Fax and Remote Setup  
.
®
®
®
Support for  
Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP, Windows XP  
®
®
Professional x64 Edition, Windows Vista , Windows Server 2003 ,  
®
®
Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition , Windows Server 2008  
E
®
Mac OS X 10.3.9 or greater  
IPv4:  
Protocols  
ARP, RARP, BOOTP, DHCP, APIPA (Auto IP),  
WINS/NetBIOS name resolution, DNS Resolver,  
mDNS, LLMNR responder, LPR/LPD,  
Custom Raw Port/Port9100, IPP/IPPS,  
FTP Client and Server, TELNET Server,  
HTTP/HTTPS Server, SSL/TLS,  
TFTP Client and Server, SMTP Client, APOP,  
POP before SMTP, SMTP AUTH, SNMPv1/v2c/v3,  
ICMP, LLTD responder,  
Web Services Print, CIFS Client, SNTP, LDAP,  
POP3/SNMP  
IPv6  
(Turned off as default) NDP, RA, DNS resolver,  
mDNS, LLMNR responder, LPR/LPD,  
Custom Raw Port/Port9100, IPP/IPPS,  
FTP Client and Server, TELNET Server,  
HTTP/HTTPS server, SSL/TLS,  
TFTP Client and Server, SMTP Client, APOP,  
POP before SMTP, SMTP AUTH, SNMPv1/v2c/v3,  
ICMPv6, LLTD responder,  
Web Services Print, CIFS Client, SNTP, LDAP,  
POP3/SNMP  
Network type  
IEEE 802.11 b/g (Wireless LAN)  
205  
 
®
®
Management  
BRAdmin Light for Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP,  
®
®
utilities  
Windows XP Professional x64 Edition, Windows Vista , Windows  
®
®
®
Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Server  
®
2008 and Mac OS X 10.3.9 or greater  
®
®
BRAdmin Professional for Windows 2000 Professional, Windows  
®
®
XP, Windows XP Professional x64 Edition, Windows Vista , Windows  
®
®
Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition and Windows  
®
Server 2008  
®
®
Web BRAdmin for Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP,  
®
®
Windows XP Professional x64 Edition, Windows Vista , Windows  
®
®
Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition and Windows  
®
Server 2008  
Client computers with a web browser supporting Java.  
1
2
3
4
5
PC Fax Send for Mac®  
Only printing for Windows Server® 2003 and Windows Server® 2008  
Mac OS® X 10.3.9 or greater (mDNS)  
For the latest driver updates, visit http://solutions.brother.com/  
BRAdmin Professional and Web BRAdmin are available as a download from http://solutions.brother.com/.  
206  
         
Specifications  
Authentication and encryption for wireless users only  
E
Authentication method  
E
The Brother machine supports the following methods:  
Open system  
Wireless devices are allowed to access the network without any authentication.  
Shared key  
A secret pre-determined key is shared by all devices that will access the wireless network. The  
Brother machine uses the WEP keys as the pre-determined key.  
E
WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK  
Enables a Wi-FI Protected Access Pre-Shared Key (WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK), which enables  
the Brother wireless machine to associate with access points using TKIP for WPA-PSK or AES  
for WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK (WPA-Personal).  
LEAP  
Cisco LEAP (Light Extensible Authentication Protocol) has been developed by Cisco Systems,  
Inc. and enables the Brother wireless product to associate with access points using CKIP  
encryptions.  
EAP-FAST  
EAP-FAST (Extensible Authentication Protocol - Flexible Authentication via Secured Tunnel)  
has been developed by Cisco Systems, Inc. which uses user ID and password for  
authentication, and symmetric key algorithms to achieve a tunneled authentication process.  
The Brother machine supports the following inner authentications:  
• EAP-FAST/NONE  
MS-CHAPv2 is used for Provisioning, and the method of EAP-FAST corresponding to  
second phase authentication method.  
• EAP-FAST/MS-CHAPv2  
Method of EAP-FAST corresponding to CCXv4 that uses MS-CHAPv2 for the inner  
method.  
• EAP-FAST/GTC  
Method of EAP-FAST corresponding to CCXv4 that uses GTC for the inner method.  
Encryption methods  
E
Encryption is used to secure the data that is sent over the wireless network. The Brother machine  
supports the following encryption methods:  
WEP  
By using WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy), the data is transmitted and received with a secure  
key.  
207  
   
TKIP  
TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) provides per-packet key mixing a message integrity  
check and re-keying mechanism.  
AES  
AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is Wi-Fi authorized strong encryption standard.  
CKIP  
The original Key Integrity Protocol for LEAP by Cisco Systems, Inc.  
Network key  
E
There are some rules for each security method:  
Open system/Shared key with WEP  
This key is a 64-bit or 128-bit value that must be entered in an ASCII or hexadecimal format.  
• 64 (40) bit ASCII:  
Uses 5 text characters. e.g.“WSLAN” (this is case sensitive).  
• 64 (40) bit hexadecimal:  
Uses 10 digits of hexadecimal data. e.g.“71f2234aba”  
• 128 (104) bit ASCII:  
Uses 13 text characters. e.g.“Wirelesscomms” (this is case sensitive)  
• 128 (104) bit hexadecimal:  
Uses 26 digits of hexadecimal data. e.g.“71f2234ab56cd709e5412aa2ba”  
WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK and TKIP or AES  
Uses a Pre-Shared Key (PSK) that is 8 or more characters in length, up to a maximum of 63  
characters.  
LEAP  
Uses User ID and Password.  
• User ID: less than 64 characters in length.  
• Password: less than 32 characters in length.  
EAP-FAST  
Uses User ID and Password.  
• User ID: less than 64 characters in length.  
• Password: less than 32 characters in length.  
208  
Specifications  
Wireless one-push configuration  
E
If your wireless access point supports either SecureEasySetup™, Wi-Fi Protected Setup (PBC )  
or AOSS™, you can configure the machine easily without knowing your wireless network settings.  
By pushing a button on the wireless LAN router / access point and using the menu on the machine,  
you can set up the wireless network and security settings. See the User’s Guide for your wireless  
LAN router / access point for instructions on how to access one-push mode.  
1
Push Button Configuration  
Note  
Router access points that support SecureEasySetup™, Wi-Fi Protected Setup or AOSS™  
have the symbols shown below.  
E
209  
   
Glossary  
F
F
This is a comprehensive list of features and terms that appear in Brother manuals. Availability of  
these features depends on the model you purchased.  
ADF (automatic document feeder)  
Coding method  
The document can be placed in the ADF  
and scanned one page at a time  
automatically.  
Method of coding the information  
contained in the document. All fax  
machines must use a minimum standard  
of Modified Huffman (MH). Your machine  
is capable of greater compression  
methods, Modified Read (MR), Modified  
Modified Read (MMR) and JBIG, if the  
receiving machine has the same  
capability.  
Auto Reduction  
Reduces the size of incoming faxes.  
Automatic fax transmission  
Sending a fax without picking up the  
handset of the external telephone or  
pressing Hook.  
Communication error (or Comm. Error)  
Automatic Redial  
An error during fax sending or receiving,  
usually caused by line noise or static.  
A feature that enables your machine to  
redial the last fax number after five  
minutes if the fax did not go through  
because the line was busy.  
Compatibility group  
The ability of one fax unit to communicate  
with another. Compatibility is assured  
between ITU-T Groups.  
Backup Print  
Your machine prints a copy of every fax  
that is received and stored in memory.  
This is a safety feature so you will not lose  
messages during a power failure.  
Contrast  
Setting to compensate for dark or light  
documents, by making faxes or copies of  
dark documents lighter and light  
documents darker.  
Batch Transmission  
As a cost saving feature, all delayed faxes  
to the same fax number will be sent as one  
transmission.  
Delayed Fax  
Sends your fax at a specified later time  
that day.  
Beeper Volume  
Distinctive Ring  
Volume setting for the beep when you  
press a key or make an error.  
A subscriber service purchased from the  
telephone company that gives you  
another telephone number on an existing  
telephone line. The Brother machine uses  
the new number to simulate a dedicated  
fax line.  
Broadcasting  
The ability to send the same fax message  
to more than one location.  
Cancel Job  
Dual Access  
Cancels a programmed print job and  
clears the machine’s memory.  
Your machine can scan outgoing faxes or  
scheduled jobs into memory at the same  
time it is sending a fax or receiving or  
printing an incoming fax.  
CNG tones  
The special tones (beeps) sent by fax  
machines during automatic transmission  
to tell the receiving machine that a fax  
machine is calling.  
210  
 
Glossary  
Easy Receive  
Fine resolution  
Enables your machine to respond to CNG  
tones if you interrupt a fax call by  
answering it.  
Resolution is 203 × 196 dpi. It is used for  
small print and graphs.  
Gray Scale  
ECM (Error Correction Mode)  
The shades of gray available for copying  
and faxing photographs.  
Detects errors during fax transmission  
and resends the pages of the fax that had  
an error.  
Group number  
A combination of One Touch and  
Speed Dial numbers that are stored on a  
One Touch key or in a Speed Dial location  
for Broadcasting.  
Extension telephone  
A telephone on the fax number that is  
plugged into a separate telephone wall  
jack.  
Help List  
External telephone  
A printout of the complete Menu table that  
you can use to program your machine  
when you do not have the User’s Guide  
with you.  
F
A telephone that is plugged into the EXT  
jack of your machine.  
F/T Ring Time  
Journal Period  
The length of time that the Brother  
machine pseudo/double-rings (when the  
Receive Mode setting is Fax/Tel) to notify  
you to pick up a voice call that it answered.  
The pre-programmed time period  
between automatically printed Fax  
Journal Reports. You can print the Fax  
Journal on demand without interrupting  
the cycle.  
Fax Forwarding  
Sends a fax received into the memory to  
another pre-programmed fax number.  
LCD (liquid crystal display)  
The display screen on the machine that  
shows interactive messages during On-  
Screen Programming and shows the date  
and time when the machine is idle.  
Fax Journal  
Lists information about the last 200  
incoming and outgoing faxes. TX means  
Transmit. RX means Receive.  
Manual fax  
Fax Receive Code  
When you lift the handset of your external  
telephone or press Hook so you can hear  
the receiving fax machine answer before  
you press Start to begin transmission.  
Press this code (l 5 1) when you answer  
a fax call on an extension or external  
telephone.  
Fax Storage  
Menu mode  
You can store faxes in the memory.  
Programming mode for changing your  
machine’s settings.  
Fax tones  
The signals sent by sending and receiving  
fax machines while communicating  
information.  
OCR (optical character recognition)  
The bundled ScanSoft™  
PaperPort™ 11SE with OCR or Presto!  
PageManager software application  
converts an image of text to text you can  
edit.  
Fax/Tel  
You can receive faxes and telephone  
calls. Do not use this mode if you are  
using a telephone answering device  
(TAD).  
211  
One Touch  
Keys on the machine’s control panel  
Remote Retrieval Access  
The ability to access your machine  
remotely from a touch tone telephone.  
where you can store numbers for easy  
dialing. You can store a second number  
on each key if you press Shift and the  
One Touch key together.  
Resolution  
The number of vertical and horizontal lines  
per inch.  
Out of Paper Reception  
Ring Delay  
Receives faxes into the machine’s  
memory when the machine is out of paper.  
The number of rings before the machine  
answers in Fax Onlyand Fax/Tel  
modes.  
Overseas Mode  
Makes temporary changes to the fax  
tones to accommodate noise and static on  
overseas telephone lines.  
Ring Volume  
Volume setting for the machine’s ring.  
Scanning  
Paging  
The process of sending an electronic  
image of a paper document into your  
computer.  
This feature enables your machine to call  
your pager when a fax is received into its  
memory.  
Search  
Pause  
An electronic, alphabetical listing of stored  
One Touch, Speed Dial and Group  
numbers.  
Allows you to place a 3.5 second delay in  
the dialing sequence while you are dialing  
using the dial pad or while you are storing  
One Touch and Speed Dial numbers.  
Press Redial/Pause as many times as  
needed for longer pauses.  
Speed Dial  
A pre-programmed number for easy  
dialing. You must press  
Search/Speed Dial, then enter the three-  
digit Speed Dial location and press Start  
to begin the dialing process.  
Polling  
The process of a fax machine calling  
another fax machine to retrieve waiting fax  
messages.  
Station ID  
The stored information that appears on  
the top of faxed pages. It includes the  
sender’s name and fax number.  
Pulse (Canada only)  
A form of rotary dialing on a telephone  
line.  
TAD (telephone answering device)  
Real Time Transmission  
You can connect an external device or  
answering machine to the EXT. jack of  
your machine.  
When memory is full, you can send faxes  
in real time.  
Remaining Jobs  
Telephone Answer Code  
(Fax/Tel mode only)  
You can check which programmed fax  
jobs are waiting in the memory and cancel  
the jobs individually.  
When the machine answers a voice call, it  
pseudo/double-rings. You can pick up at  
an extension telephone by pressing this  
code (#51).  
Remote Access Code  
Your own four-digit code (– – –l) that  
allows you to call and access your  
machine from a remote location.  
Tel Index List  
A listing of names and numbers stored in  
One Touch and Speed Dial memory, in  
numerical order.  
212  
Glossary  
Temporary settings  
You can choose certain options for each  
fax transmission and copy without  
changing the default settings.  
Tone  
A form of dialing on the telephone line  
used for Touch Tone telephones.  
Transmission  
The process of sending faxes over the  
telephone lines from your machine to the  
receiving fax machine.  
Transmission Verification Report  
A report for each transmission, that shows  
its date, time and number.  
F
User Settings List  
A printed report that shows the current  
settings of the machine.  
213  
Index  
G
ControlCenter2 (for Macintosh )  
A
®
See Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
ControlCenter3 (for Windows )  
See Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
Accessories and supplies .......................... ii  
ADF (automatic document feeder)  
Answering machine (TAD)  
®
Copy  
Apple Macintosh  
®
®
using scanner glass ........................86, 87  
Cordless telephone (non-Brother) ........... 61  
See Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
Automatic  
B
setting up groups for .............................67  
Brother  
accessories and supplies ........................ ii  
FAQs (frequently asked questions) ..........i  
C
D
Canceling  
Delayed batch transmission .................... 46  
Dialing  
access codes and credit  
Cleaning  
groups (broadcasting) .......................... 41  
laser scanner window .........................149  
Connecting  
external TAD (answering machine) .......57  
two-line external TAD or telephone .......59  
214  
 
Distinctive Ring  
choosing ring pattern ............................55  
Document  
Drum unit  
checking (remaining life) .....................161  
Duplex (2-sided)  
printing from memory ........................... 53  
Fax, stand-alone  
at end of conversation ....................... 53  
from extension telephone ............60, 61  
into memory (fax storage) ................. 71  
reducing to fit on paper ..................... 52  
retrieving from a remote site .......75, 76  
telephone line interference .............. 133  
at end of conversation ....................... 47  
canceling from memory ..................... 46  
from memory (dual access) ............... 45  
real time transmission ....................... 45  
telephone line interference .............. 133  
Fax/Tel mode  
printing  
from USB flash memory drive ............94  
Duplex key (2-sided) ...................38, 87, 88  
G
E
Error messages on LCD ........................134  
Extension telephone, using ......................61  
External telephone, connecting ................60  
answering at extension telephones ...... 61  
F/T ring time (double-ring) .................... 50  
telephone answer code ........................ 61  
F
Fax codes  
telephone answer code .........................61  
Fax forwarding  
programming a number ........................70  
215  
checking the remaining life of drum unit and  
periodic maintenance parts ................ 161  
replacing  
G
Groups for broadcasting ..........................67  
Manual  
H
Memory  
adding SO-DIMM (option) .................. 115  
Mode, entering  
I
Multi-line connections (PBX) ................... 59  
J
Jacks  
convert to RJ11 jack  
EXT  
N
Network  
faxing  
TAD (answering machine) .................57  
Jams  
See Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
printing  
See Network User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
scanning  
L
See Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
LCD (liquid crystal display) ............... 6, 165  
O
One touch  
M
Out of Memory message .... 47, 90, 94, 136  
Machine information  
checking remaining life of drum unit  
and periodic maintenance parts ..........161  
®
Macintosh  
See Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
216  
access codes and credit card numbers 68  
group dial  
setting up groups for broadcasting .... 67  
one touch dial  
speed dial  
P
Packing and shipping the machine ........163  
programming your pager number .. 70, 71  
PaperPort™ 11SE with OCR  
See Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM and Help in the PaperPort™  
11SE application to access How-to-Guides.  
PC Fax  
G
See Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
Polling  
R
Redial/Pause key ........................63, 64, 68  
Reducing  
Remote setup  
See Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
Replacing  
Network Configuration .......................... 80  
Transmission Verification ..................... 79  
Print  
Printing  
See Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
Programming your machine ...................165  
Q
Quality  
217  
Resolution  
fax (standard, fine, superfine,  
T
TAD (telephone answering device),  
Telephone line  
two-line telephone system .................... 58  
Temporary copy settings ......................... 83  
Toner cartridge, replacing ..................... 155  
Tray use, setting  
error messages on LCD ..................... 134  
if you are having difficulty  
maintenance messages on LCD ........ 134  
Two-line telephone system ...................... 58  
S
Scanner glass  
Scanning  
See Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
Search/Speed Dial key ...............62, 63, 67  
Security  
Secure function lock  
administrator password ......................30  
Serial number  
how to find...............See inside front cover  
SimpleBiz Fax & Alternate Number  
Speed dial  
V
Volume, setting  
218  
W
Warranties  
®
Windows  
See Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
Wireless Network  
See Quick Setup Guide and Network  
User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.  
G
219  
220  
EQUIPMENT ATTACHMENT LIMITATIONS  
(Canada only)  
NOTICE  
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.  
NOTICE  
The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to  
be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any  
combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices  
does not exceed five.  
Brother International Corporation  
100 Somerset Corporate Boulevard  
P.O. Box 6911  
Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911 USA  
Brother International Corporation (Canada) Ltd.  
1 rue Hôtel de Ville,  
Dollard-des-Ormeaux, QC, Canada H9B 3H6  
Visit us on the World Wide Web  
These machines are made for use in the USA and Canada only. We cannot recommend using  
them overseas because it may violate the Telecommunications Regulations of that country and  
the power requirements of your machine may not be compatible with the power available in foreign  
countries. Using USA or Canada models overseas is at your own risk and may void your  
warranty.  

Briggs Stratton 80400 User Manual
Bryant 619FNF User Manual
Carrier INFINITY 48XL A User Manual
Cecilware Arctic Series User Manual
Cooline ZAMIL PT036 User Manual
Energizer E95 User Manual
Frigidaire FSC12CH8MV User Manual
Haier Air Conditioner HPRD12XC7 User Manual
Hollywood Baja Bicycle Carriers B3 User Manual
Honda Automobiles Music Link AAM 31052 31557 User Manual